1 /* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only */
2 /*
3  * mac80211 <-> driver interface
4  *
5  * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
6  * Copyright 2006-2007	Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
7  * Copyright 2007-2010	Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
8  * Copyright 2013-2014  Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
9  * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH
10  * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2022 Intel Corporation
11  */
12 
13 #ifndef MAC80211_H
14 #define MAC80211_H
15 
16 #include <linux/bug.h>
17 #include <linux/kernel.h>
18 #include <linux/if_ether.h>
19 #include <linux/skbuff.h>
20 #include <linux/ieee80211.h>
21 #include <linux/lockdep.h>
22 #include <net/cfg80211.h>
23 #include <net/codel.h>
24 #include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h>
25 #include <asm/unaligned.h>
26 
27 /**
28  * DOC: Introduction
29  *
30  * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
31  * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
32  * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
33  * drivers.
34  */
35 
36 /**
37  * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
38  *
39  * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
40  * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
41  * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
42  * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
43  * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
44  * tasklet function.
45  *
46  * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
47  *	 use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
48  */
49 
50 /**
51  * DOC: Warning
52  *
53  * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
54  * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
55  */
56 
57 /**
58  * DOC: Frame format
59  *
60  * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
61  * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
62  * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
63  * hardware.
64  *
65  * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
66  *
67  * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
68  * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
69  *
70  * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
71  * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
72  */
73 
74 /**
75  * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
76  *
77  * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
78  * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
79  * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
80  * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
81  *
82  * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
83  * suspend.
84  *
85  * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
86  *
87  */
88 
89 /**
90  * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
91  *
92  * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
93  * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
94  * between different stations/interfaces.
95  * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
96  * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
97  * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
98  *
99  * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
100  * driver operation.
101  *
102  * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with
103  * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and
104  * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
105  *
106  * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
107  * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
108  *
109  * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame from a
110  * txq, it calls ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a
111  * queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
112  *
113  * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to
114  * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to
115  * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls
116  * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using
117  * ieee80211_return_txq().
118  *
119  * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
120  * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
121  * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
122  * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
123  * .release_buffered_frames().
124  * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
125  * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
126  * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
127  */
128 
129 /**
130  * DOC: HW timestamping
131  *
132  * Timing Measurement and Fine Timing Measurement require accurate timestamps
133  * of the action frames TX/RX and their respective acks.
134  *
135  * To report hardware timestamps for Timing Measurement or Fine Timing
136  * Measurement frame RX, the low level driver should set the SKB's hwtstamp
137  * field to the frame RX timestamp and report the ack TX timestamp in the
138  * ieee80211_rx_status struct.
139  *
140  * Similarly, To report hardware timestamps for Timing Measurement or Fine
141  * Timing Measurement frame TX, the driver should set the SKB's hwtstamp field
142  * to the frame TX timestamp and report the ack RX timestamp in the
143  * ieee80211_tx_status struct.
144  */
145 struct device;
146 
147 /**
148  * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
149  *
150  * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
151  * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
152  */
153 enum ieee80211_max_queues {
154 	IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES =		16,
155 	IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP =	BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
156 };
157 
158 #define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE	0xff
159 
160 /**
161  * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
162  * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
163  * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
164  * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
165  * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
166  */
167 enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
168 	IEEE80211_AC_VO		= 0,
169 	IEEE80211_AC_VI		= 1,
170 	IEEE80211_AC_BE		= 2,
171 	IEEE80211_AC_BK		= 3,
172 };
173 
174 /**
175  * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
176  *
177  * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
178  * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
179  *
180  * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
181  * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
182  *	2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
183  * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
184  * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
185  * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
186  * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
187  * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured
188  * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE
189  */
190 struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
191 	u16 txop;
192 	u16 cw_min;
193 	u16 cw_max;
194 	u8 aifs;
195 	bool acm;
196 	bool uapsd;
197 	bool mu_edca;
198 	struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec;
199 };
200 
201 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
202 	unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
203 	unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
204 	unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
205 	unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
206 };
207 
208 /**
209  * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
210  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
211  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
212  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
213  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
214  *	this is used only with channel switching with CSA
215  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
216  */
217 enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
218 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH		= BIT(0),
219 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS	= BIT(1),
220 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR		= BIT(2),
221 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL	= BIT(3),
222 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH	= BIT(4),
223 };
224 
225 /**
226  * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
227  *
228  * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
229  * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
230  *
231  * @def: the channel definition
232  * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
233  * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
234  *	active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
235  * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
236  *	after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
237  *	this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
238  * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
239  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
240  *	sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
241  */
242 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
243 	struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
244 	struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
245 
246 	u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
247 
248 	bool radar_enabled;
249 
250 	u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
251 };
252 
253 /**
254  * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
255  * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
256  *	exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
257  *	needs to be switched from one to the other.
258  * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
259  *      to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
260  *      will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
261  *      from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
262  *      implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
263  *      hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
264  *      will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
265  *      for changes/removal.)
266  */
267 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
268 	CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
269 	CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
270 };
271 
272 /**
273  * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
274  *
275  * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
276  * needs to switch from one chanctx to another.  The
277  * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
278  * done.
279  *
280  * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
281  * @link_conf: the link conf that's switching
282  * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
283  * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
284  */
285 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
286 	struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
287 	struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf;
288 	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
289 	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
290 };
291 
292 /**
293  * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
294  *
295  * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed(), link_info_changed()
296  * and vif_cfg_changed() callbacks to indicate which parameter(s) changed.
297  *
298  * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
299  *	also implies a change in the AID.
300  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
301  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
302  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
303  * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
304  * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
305  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
306  * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
307  *	reason (IBSS and managed mode)
308  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
309  *	new beacon (beaconing modes)
310  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
311  *	enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
312  * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
313  * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
314  * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
315  * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
316  *	that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
317  * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
318  * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
319  * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
320  * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
321  * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
322  * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
323  *	changed
324  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
325  *	currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
326  * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
327  *	note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
328  *	context had been assigned.
329  * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
330  * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
331  * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected
332  *	keep alive) changed.
333  * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface
334  * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fine timing measurement request responder
335  *	functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode).
336  * @BSS_CHANGED_TWT: TWT status changed
337  * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD: OBSS Packet Detection status changed.
338  * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR: BSS Color has changed
339  * @BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY: FILS discovery status changed.
340  * @BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP: Unsolicited broadcast probe response
341  *	status changed.
342  *
343  */
344 enum ieee80211_bss_change {
345 	BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC		= 1<<0,
346 	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT	= 1<<1,
347 	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE	= 1<<2,
348 	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT		= 1<<3,
349 	BSS_CHANGED_HT			= 1<<4,
350 	BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES		= 1<<5,
351 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT		= 1<<6,
352 	BSS_CHANGED_BSSID		= 1<<7,
353 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON		= 1<<8,
354 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED	= 1<<9,
355 	BSS_CHANGED_CQM			= 1<<10,
356 	BSS_CHANGED_IBSS		= 1<<11,
357 	BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER		= 1<<12,
358 	BSS_CHANGED_QOS			= 1<<13,
359 	BSS_CHANGED_IDLE		= 1<<14,
360 	BSS_CHANGED_SSID		= 1<<15,
361 	BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP	= 1<<16,
362 	BSS_CHANGED_PS			= 1<<17,
363 	BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER		= 1<<18,
364 	BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS		= 1<<19,
365 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO		= 1<<20,
366 	BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH		= 1<<21,
367 	BSS_CHANGED_OCB                 = 1<<22,
368 	BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS		= 1<<23,
369 	BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE		= 1<<24,
370 	BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE		= 1<<25,
371 	BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER	= 1<<26,
372 	BSS_CHANGED_TWT			= 1<<27,
373 	BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD		= 1<<28,
374 	BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR	= 1<<29,
375 	BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY      = 1<<30,
376 	BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP = 1<<31,
377 
378 	/* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
379 };
380 
381 /*
382  * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
383  * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
384  * filtering will be disabled.
385  */
386 #define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
387 
388 /**
389  * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
390  * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
391  * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
392  * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
393  * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
394  *	they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
395  *	once each time the timeout triggers.
396  */
397 enum ieee80211_event_type {
398 	RSSI_EVENT,
399 	MLME_EVENT,
400 	BAR_RX_EVENT,
401 	BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
402 };
403 
404 /**
405  * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
406  * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
407  * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
408  */
409 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
410 	RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
411 	RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
412 };
413 
414 /**
415  * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
416  * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
417  */
418 struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
419 	enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
420 };
421 
422 /**
423  * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
424  * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
425  * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
426  * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
427  * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
428  */
429 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
430 	AUTH_EVENT,
431 	ASSOC_EVENT,
432 	DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
433 	DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
434 };
435 
436 /**
437  * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
438  * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
439  * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
440  * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
441  */
442 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
443 	MLME_SUCCESS,
444 	MLME_DENIED,
445 	MLME_TIMEOUT,
446 };
447 
448 /**
449  * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
450  * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
451  * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
452  * @reason: the reason code if applicable
453  */
454 struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
455 	enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
456 	enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
457 	u16 reason;
458 };
459 
460 /**
461  * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
462  * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
463  * @tid: the tid
464  * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
465  */
466 struct ieee80211_ba_event {
467 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
468 	u16 tid;
469 	u16 ssn;
470 };
471 
472 /**
473  * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
474  * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
475  * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
476  * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
477  * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
478  * @u:union holding the fields above
479  */
480 struct ieee80211_event {
481 	enum ieee80211_event_type type;
482 	union {
483 		struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
484 		struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
485 		struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
486 	} u;
487 };
488 
489 /**
490  * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
491  *
492  * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
493  *
494  * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
495  * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
496  */
497 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
498 	u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
499 	u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
500 };
501 
502 /**
503  * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters
504  *
505  * @lci: LCI subelement content
506  * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content
507  * @lci_len: LCI data length
508  * @civicloc_len: Civic data length
509  */
510 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params {
511 	const u8 *lci;
512 	const u8 *civicloc;
513 	size_t lci_len;
514 	size_t civicloc_len;
515 };
516 
517 /**
518  * struct ieee80211_fils_discovery - FILS discovery parameters from
519  * IEEE Std 802.11ai-2016, Annex C.3 MIB detail.
520  *
521  * @min_interval: Minimum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000)
522  * @max_interval: Maximum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000)
523  */
524 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery {
525 	u32 min_interval;
526 	u32 max_interval;
527 };
528 
529 /**
530  * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
531  *
532  * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
533  * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
534  *
535  * @addr: (link) address used locally
536  * @link_id: link ID, or 0 for non-MLO
537  * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE
538  * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP
539  * @ack_enabled: indicates support to receive a multi-TID that solicits either
540  *	ACK, BACK or both
541  * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field
542  * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us
543  * @he_support: does this BSS support HE
544  * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
545  *	mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
546  * @twt_responder: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
547  *	mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
548  * @twt_protected: does this BSS support protected TWT frames
549  * @twt_broadcast: does this BSS support broadcast TWT
550  * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
551  * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
552  * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
553  * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
554  *	valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
555  *	with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
556  * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
557  *	as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
558  *	HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
559  *	only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
560  *	association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
561  *	%BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
562  * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
563  *	the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
564  *	(see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
565  * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
566  *	is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
567  *	IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
568  *	by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
569  *	guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
570  *	Note also that this is not used with MLD associations, mac80211 doesn't
571  *	know how to track beacons for all of the links for this.
572  * @beacon_int: beacon interval
573  * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
574  * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
575  *	index into the rate table configured by the driver in
576  *	the current band.
577  * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
578  * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
579  * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
580  * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
581  * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
582  *	configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
583  * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
584  * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
585  *	This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
586  *	Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
587  *	be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
588  * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
589  *	implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
590  *	cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
591  *	relation to the newly configured threshold.
592  * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value
593  *	implies disabled.  This is an alternative mechanism to the single
594  *	threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it.
595  * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold.
596  * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
597  * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
598  * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
599  * @txpower: TX power in dBm.  INT_MIN means not configured.
600  * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
601  *	Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
602  *	TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
603  *	NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
604  *	userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
605  *	NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
606  * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
607  * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed
608  *	to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS
609  *	if it has associated clients without P2P PS support.
610  * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from
611  *	transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated.
612  *	In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include
613  *	a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element.
614  * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN
615  *	protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the
616  *	station.
617  * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM
618  *	responder functionality.
619  * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder.
620  * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile
621  * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP
622  * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set
623  * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set
624  * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of
625  *	nontransmitted BSSIDs
626  * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received
627  *	in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set.
628  * @he_oper: HE operation information of the BSS (AP/Mesh) or of the AP we are
629  *	connected to (STA)
630  * @he_obss_pd: OBSS Packet Detection parameters.
631  * @he_bss_color: BSS coloring settings, if BSS supports HE
632  * @fils_discovery: FILS discovery configuration
633  * @unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval: Unsolicited broadcast probe response
634  *	interval.
635  * @beacon_tx_rate: The configured beacon transmit rate that needs to be passed
636  *	to driver when rate control is offloaded to firmware.
637  * @power_type: power type of BSS for 6 GHz
638  * @tx_pwr_env: transmit power envelope array of BSS.
639  * @tx_pwr_env_num: number of @tx_pwr_env.
640  * @pwr_reduction: power constraint of BSS.
641  * @eht_support: does this BSS support EHT
642  * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
643  *	write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
644  *	for read access.
645  * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability
646  * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
647  *	when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
648  *	path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
649  *	be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
650  *	processed after it switches back to %NULL.
651  * @color_change_active: marks whether a color change is ongoing. Internally it is
652  *	write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
653  *	for read access.
654  * @color_change_color: the bss color that will be used after the change.
655  */
656 struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
657 	const u8 *bssid;
658 	unsigned int link_id;
659 	u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
660 	u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext;
661 	bool uora_exists;
662 	u8 uora_ocw_range;
663 	u16 frame_time_rts_th;
664 	bool he_support;
665 	bool twt_requester;
666 	bool twt_responder;
667 	bool twt_protected;
668 	bool twt_broadcast;
669 	/* erp related data */
670 	bool use_cts_prot;
671 	bool use_short_preamble;
672 	bool use_short_slot;
673 	bool enable_beacon;
674 	u8 dtim_period;
675 	u16 beacon_int;
676 	u16 assoc_capability;
677 	u64 sync_tsf;
678 	u32 sync_device_ts;
679 	u8 sync_dtim_count;
680 	u32 basic_rates;
681 	struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
682 	int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
683 	u16 ht_operation_mode;
684 	s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
685 	u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
686 	s32 cqm_rssi_low;
687 	s32 cqm_rssi_high;
688 	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
689 	struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
690 	bool qos;
691 	bool hidden_ssid;
692 	int txpower;
693 	enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
694 	struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
695 	bool allow_p2p_go_ps;
696 	u16 max_idle_period;
697 	bool protected_keep_alive;
698 	bool ftm_responder;
699 	struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params;
700 	/* Multiple BSSID data */
701 	bool nontransmitted;
702 	u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN];
703 	u8 bssid_index;
704 	u8 bssid_indicator;
705 	bool ema_ap;
706 	u8 profile_periodicity;
707 	struct {
708 		u32 params;
709 		u16 nss_set;
710 	} he_oper;
711 	struct ieee80211_he_obss_pd he_obss_pd;
712 	struct cfg80211_he_bss_color he_bss_color;
713 	struct ieee80211_fils_discovery fils_discovery;
714 	u32 unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval;
715 	struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask beacon_tx_rate;
716 	enum ieee80211_ap_reg_power power_type;
717 	struct ieee80211_tx_pwr_env tx_pwr_env[IEEE80211_TPE_MAX_IE_COUNT];
718 	u8 tx_pwr_env_num;
719 	u8 pwr_reduction;
720 	bool eht_support;
721 
722 	bool csa_active;
723 	bool mu_mimo_owner;
724 	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
725 
726 	bool color_change_active;
727 	u8 color_change_color;
728 };
729 
730 /**
731  * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
732  *
733  * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
734  *
735  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
736  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
737  *	number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
738  *	number and increasing the sequence number only when the
739  *	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
740  *	assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
741  *	for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
742  *	that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
743  *	If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
744  *	assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
745  *	802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
746  *	beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
747  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
748  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
749  *	station
750  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
751  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
752  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
753  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
754  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
755  *	because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
756  *	avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
757  *	firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
758  *	went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
759  *	the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
760  *	that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
761  *	since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
762  *	hardware queue.
763  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
764  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
765  * 	is for the whole aggregation.
766  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
767  * 	so consider using block ack request (BAR).
768  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
769  *	set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
770  *	be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
771  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
772  *	that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
773  *	off-channel operation.
774  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP: This frame uses hardware encapsulation
775  *	(header conversion)
776  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
777  *	used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
778  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
779  *	used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
780  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
781  *	frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
782  *	be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
783  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
784  *	transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
785  *	by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
786  *	queue gets full.
787  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
788  *	after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
789  *	be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
790  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
791  *	code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
792  *	should kick the MLME state machine.
793  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
794  *	MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
795  *	status to user space)
796  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
797  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
798  *	frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
799  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
800  *	the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
801  *	in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
802  *	handled properly by the device.
803  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
804  *	testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
805  *	TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
806  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
807  *	This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
808  *	frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
809  * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
810  *	when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
811  *	an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
812  *	the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
813  *	PS-Poll responses.
814  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
815  *	This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
816  *	the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
817  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
818  *	would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
819  *	monitor injection).
820  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
821  *	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
822  *	any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
823  *	This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
824  *	behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
825  *
826  * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
827  *	 forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
828  */
829 enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
830 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS		= BIT(0),
831 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ		= BIT(1),
832 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK			= BIT(2),
833 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT		= BIT(3),
834 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT		= BIT(4),
835 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM	= BIT(5),
836 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU			= BIT(6),
837 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED		= BIT(7),
838 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED		= BIT(8),
839 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK			= BIT(9),
840 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU			= BIT(10),
841 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK		= BIT(11),
842 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE	= BIT(12),
843 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK	= BIT(13),
844 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP		= BIT(14),
845 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED		= BIT(15),
846 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT		= BIT(16),
847 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER		= BIT(17),
848 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES		= BIT(18),
849 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION	= BIT(19),
850 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX		= BIT(20),
851 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX	= BIT(21),
852 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC			= BIT(22),
853 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC			= BIT(23) | BIT(24),
854 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN		= BIT(25),
855 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE	= BIT(26),
856 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE		= BIT(27),
857 	IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP		= BIT(28),
858 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE		= BIT(29),
859 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG		= BIT(30),
860 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED	= BIT(31),
861 };
862 
863 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT		23
864 
865 #define IEEE80211_TX_RC_S1G_MCS IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS
866 
867 /**
868  * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
869  *
870  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
871  *	protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
872  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
873  *	frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
874  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
875  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame
876  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path
877  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup
878  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
879  *	used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
880  *	it can be sent out.
881  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO: Do not overwrite the sequence number that
882  *	has already been assigned to this frame.
883  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER: This frame should not be reordered
884  *	relative to other frames that have this flag set, independent
885  *	of their QoS TID or other priority field values.
886  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MCAST_MLO_FIRST_TX: first MLO TX, used mostly internally
887  *	for sequence number assignment
888  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK: If not @IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED, this
889  *	frame should be transmitted on the specific link. This really is
890  *	only relevant for frames that do not have data present, and is
891  *	also not used for 802.3 format frames. Note that even if the frame
892  *	is on a specific link, address translation might still apply if
893  *	it's intended for an MLD.
894  *
895  * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
896  */
897 enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
898 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO	= BIT(0),
899 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE		= BIT(1),
900 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT		= BIT(2),
901 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU			= BIT(3),
902 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT		= BIT(4),
903 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP	= BIT(5),
904 	IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING	= BIT(6),
905 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO		= BIT(7),
906 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER		= BIT(8),
907 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MCAST_MLO_FIRST_TX	= BIT(9),
908 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK		= 0xf0000000,
909 };
910 
911 #define IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED	0xf
912 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK_UNSPEC	\
913 	u32_encode_bits(IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED, \
914 			IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK)
915 
916 /**
917  * enum mac80211_tx_status_flags - flags to describe transmit status
918  *
919  * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_ACK_SIGNAL_VALID: ACK signal is valid
920  *
921  * These flags are used in tx_info->status.flags.
922  */
923 enum mac80211_tx_status_flags {
924 	IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_ACK_SIGNAL_VALID = BIT(0),
925 };
926 
927 /*
928  * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
929  * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
930  */
931 #define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK |		      \
932 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT |    \
933 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU |	      \
934 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED |	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK |		      \
935 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK |	      \
936 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER |    \
937 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC |		      \
938 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
939 
940 /**
941  * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
942  *	Rate Control algorithm.
943  *
944  * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
945  * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
946  *
947  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
948  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
949  *	This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
950  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
951  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
952  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
953  *	into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
954  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
955  *	Greenfield mode.
956  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
957  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
958  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
959  *	(80+80 isn't supported yet)
960  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
961  *	adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
962  *	NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
963  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
964  */
965 enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
966 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS		= BIT(0),
967 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT		= BIT(1),
968 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE	= BIT(2),
969 
970 	/* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
971 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS			= BIT(3),
972 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD		= BIT(4),
973 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(5),
974 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA		= BIT(6),
975 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI		= BIT(7),
976 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS			= BIT(8),
977 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(9),
978 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(10),
979 };
980 
981 
982 /* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
983 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
984 
985 /* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
986 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
987 
988 /* maximum number of rate stages */
989 #define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES	4
990 
991 /* maximum number of rate table entries */
992 #define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE	4
993 
994 /**
995  * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
996  *
997  * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
998  * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
999  * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
1000  *
1001  * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
1002  * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
1003  *
1004  * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
1005  * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
1006  *
1007  * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
1008  * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
1009  * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
1010  * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
1011  * information::
1012  *
1013  *    { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
1014  *
1015  * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
1016  * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
1017  * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
1018  * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
1019  * information should then contain::
1020  *
1021  *   { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
1022  *
1023  * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
1024  * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
1025  */
1026 struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
1027 	s8 idx;
1028 	u16 count:5,
1029 	    flags:11;
1030 } __packed;
1031 
1032 #define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY		31
1033 
ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate * rate,u8 mcs,u8 nss)1034 static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
1035 					  u8 mcs, u8 nss)
1036 {
1037 	WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
1038 	WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
1039 	rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
1040 }
1041 
1042 static inline u8
ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate * rate)1043 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
1044 {
1045 	return rate->idx & 0xF;
1046 }
1047 
1048 static inline u8
ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate * rate)1049 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
1050 {
1051 	return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
1052 }
1053 
1054 /**
1055  * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
1056  *
1057  * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
1058  *  (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
1059  *  (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
1060  *  (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
1061  *
1062  * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
1063  * @band: the band to transmit on (use e.g. for checking for races),
1064  *	not valid if the interface is an MLD since we won't know which
1065  *	link the frame will be transmitted on
1066  * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
1067  * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
1068  * @tx_time_est: TX time estimate in units of 4us, used internally
1069  * @control: union part for control data
1070  * @control.rates: TX rates array to try
1071  * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS
1072  * @control.use_rts: use RTS
1073  * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS
1074  * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only)
1075  * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table
1076  * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients
1077  * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL)
1078  * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL)
1079  * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags
1080  * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs)
1081  * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space
1082  * @pad: padding
1083  * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates
1084  * @status: union part for status data
1085  * @status.rates: attempted rates
1086  * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal
1087  * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length
1088  * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length
1089  * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy)
1090  * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission; note this is only
1091  *	used for WMM AC, not for airtime fairness
1092  * @status.flags: status flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_status_flags
1093  * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area
1094  * @ack: union part for pure ACK data
1095  * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK
1096  * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
1097  * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
1098  * 	relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1099  * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
1100  * 	relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1101  * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
1102  */
1103 struct ieee80211_tx_info {
1104 	/* common information */
1105 	u32 flags;
1106 	u32 band:3,
1107 	    ack_frame_id:13,
1108 	    hw_queue:4,
1109 	    tx_time_est:10;
1110 	/* 2 free bits */
1111 
1112 	union {
1113 		struct {
1114 			union {
1115 				/* rate control */
1116 				struct {
1117 					struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
1118 						IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1119 					s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
1120 					u8 use_rts:1;
1121 					u8 use_cts_prot:1;
1122 					u8 short_preamble:1;
1123 					u8 skip_table:1;
1124 					/* 2 bytes free */
1125 				};
1126 				/* only needed before rate control */
1127 				unsigned long jiffies;
1128 			};
1129 			/* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
1130 			struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1131 			struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
1132 			u32 flags;
1133 			codel_time_t enqueue_time;
1134 		} control;
1135 		struct {
1136 			u64 cookie;
1137 		} ack;
1138 		struct {
1139 			struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1140 			s32 ack_signal;
1141 			u8 ampdu_ack_len;
1142 			u8 ampdu_len;
1143 			u8 antenna;
1144 			u16 tx_time;
1145 			u8 flags;
1146 			void *status_driver_data[18 / sizeof(void *)];
1147 		} status;
1148 		struct {
1149 			struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
1150 				IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1151 			u8 pad[4];
1152 
1153 			void *rate_driver_data[
1154 				IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1155 		};
1156 		void *driver_data[
1157 			IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1158 	};
1159 };
1160 
1161 static inline u16
ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info * info,u16 tx_time_est)1162 ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, u16 tx_time_est)
1163 {
1164 	/* We only have 10 bits in tx_time_est, so store airtime
1165 	 * in increments of 4us and clamp the maximum to 2**12-1
1166 	 */
1167 	info->tx_time_est = min_t(u16, tx_time_est, 4095) >> 2;
1168 	return info->tx_time_est << 2;
1169 }
1170 
1171 static inline u16
ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info * info)1172 ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1173 {
1174 	return info->tx_time_est << 2;
1175 }
1176 
1177 /***
1178  * struct ieee80211_rate_status - mrr stage for status path
1179  *
1180  * This struct is used in struct ieee80211_tx_status to provide drivers a
1181  * dynamic way to report about used rates and power levels per packet.
1182  *
1183  * @rate_idx The actual used rate.
1184  * @try_count How often the rate was tried.
1185  * @tx_power_idx An idx into the ieee80211_hw->tx_power_levels list of the
1186  * 	corresponding wifi hardware. The idx shall point to the power level
1187  * 	that was used when sending the packet.
1188  */
1189 struct ieee80211_rate_status {
1190 	struct rate_info rate_idx;
1191 	u8 try_count;
1192 	u8 tx_power_idx;
1193 };
1194 
1195 /**
1196  * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx status info for rate control
1197  *
1198  * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for
1199  * @info: Basic tx status information
1200  * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver)
1201  * @rates: Mrr stages that were used when sending the packet
1202  * @n_rates: Number of mrr stages (count of instances for @rates)
1203  * @free_list: list where processed skbs are stored to be free'd by the driver
1204  * @ack_hwtstamp: Hardware timestamp of the received ack in nanoseconds
1205  *	Only needed for Timing measurement and Fine timing measurement action
1206  *	frames. Only reported by devices that have timestamping enabled.
1207  */
1208 struct ieee80211_tx_status {
1209 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1210 	struct ieee80211_tx_info *info;
1211 	struct sk_buff *skb;
1212 	struct ieee80211_rate_status *rates;
1213 	ktime_t ack_hwtstamp;
1214 	u8 n_rates;
1215 
1216 	struct list_head *free_list;
1217 };
1218 
1219 /**
1220  * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
1221  *
1222  * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
1223  * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
1224  * and the ones generated by mac80211.
1225  *
1226  * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
1227  * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
1228  * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
1229  * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
1230  */
1231 struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
1232 	const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1233 	size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1234 	const u8 *common_ies;
1235 	size_t common_ie_len;
1236 };
1237 
1238 
IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff * skb)1239 static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1240 {
1241 	return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
1242 }
1243 
IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff * skb)1244 static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1245 {
1246 	return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
1247 }
1248 
1249 /**
1250  * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
1251  *
1252  * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
1253  *
1254  * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
1255  * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
1256  * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
1257  * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
1258  *
1259  * NOTE: While the rates array is kept intact, this will wipe all of the
1260  *	 driver_data fields in info, so it's up to the driver to restore
1261  *	 any fields it needs after calling this helper.
1262  */
1263 static inline void
ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info * info)1264 ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1265 {
1266 	int i;
1267 
1268 	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1269 		     offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
1270 	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1271 		     offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
1272 	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
1273 	/* clear the rate counts */
1274 	for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
1275 		info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
1276 	memset_after(&info->status, 0, rates);
1277 }
1278 
1279 
1280 /**
1281  * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
1282  *
1283  * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1284  * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
1285  *	Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
1286  * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
1287  * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
1288  *	verification has been done by the hardware.
1289  * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame.
1290  *	If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
1291  *	hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
1292  * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
1293  *	flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
1294  *	Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
1295  *	is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
1296  * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did
1297  *	de-duplication by itself.
1298  * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
1299  *	the frame.
1300  * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
1301  *	the frame.
1302  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1303  *	field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
1304  *	was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
1305  *	merging.
1306  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1307  *	field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
1308  *	(including FCS) was received.
1309  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1310  *	field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
1311  * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1312  *	Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
1313  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1314  *	number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1315  *	each A-MPDU
1316  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1317  *	subframes of a single A-MPDU
1318  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1319  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1320  *	on this subframe
1321  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1322  *	is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
1323  * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was
1324  *	done by the hardware
1325  * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
1326  *	processing it in any regular way.
1327  *	This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1328  *	them for sniffing purposes.
1329  * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
1330  *	monitor interfaces.
1331  *	This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1332  *	them for sniffing purposes.
1333  * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1334  *	subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1335  *	All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1336  *	if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1337  *	the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1338  *	deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1339  *	subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1340  *	either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1341  *	interleaved with other frames.
1342  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1343  *	radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1344  *	the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
1345  * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before.
1346  *	This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as
1347  *	the first subframe.
1348  * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must
1349  *	be done in the hardware.
1350  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this
1351  *	frame
1352  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known
1353  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present
1354  *	(&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in
1355  *
1356  *	 - DATA3_DATA_MCS
1357  *	 - DATA3_DATA_DCM
1358  *	 - DATA3_CODING
1359  *	 - DATA5_GI
1360  *	 - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC
1361  *	 - DATA6_NSTS
1362  *	 - DATA3_STBC
1363  *
1364  *	from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data)
1365  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present
1366  *	(&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu)
1367  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present
1368  * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with
1369  *	the "0-length PSDU" field included there.  The value for it is
1370  *	in &struct ieee80211_rx_status.  Note that if this value isn't
1371  *	known the frame shouldn't be reported.
1372  * @RX_FLAG_8023: the frame has an 802.3 header (decap offload performed by
1373  *	hardware or driver)
1374  */
1375 enum mac80211_rx_flags {
1376 	RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR		= BIT(0),
1377 	RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED		= BIT(1),
1378 	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START	= BIT(2),
1379 	RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED		= BIT(3),
1380 	RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED		= BIT(4),
1381 	RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC		= BIT(5),
1382 	RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC 	= BIT(6),
1383 	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START		= BIT(7),
1384 	RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL		= BIT(8),
1385 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS		= BIT(9),
1386 	RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED		= BIT(10),
1387 	RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED		= BIT(11),
1388 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN	= BIT(12),
1389 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST		= BIT(13),
1390 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR	= BIT(14),
1391 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN	= BIT(15),
1392 	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END		= BIT(16),
1393 	RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR		= BIT(17),
1394 	RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR		= BIT(18),
1395 	RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE		= BIT(19),
1396 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA	= BIT(20),
1397 	RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED		= BIT(21),
1398 	RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN		= BIT(22),
1399 	RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED		= BIT(23),
1400 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT		= BIT(24),
1401 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN	= BIT(25),
1402 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE		= BIT(26),
1403 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU		= BIT(27),
1404 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG		= BIT(28),
1405 	RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU			= BIT(29),
1406 	RX_FLAG_8023			= BIT(30),
1407 };
1408 
1409 /**
1410  * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags
1411  *
1412  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
1413  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
1414  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission,
1415  *	if the driver fills this value it should add
1416  *	%IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1417  *	to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact.
1418  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
1419  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
1420  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
1421  */
1422 enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags {
1423 	RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE		= BIT(0),
1424 	RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI		= BIT(2),
1425 	RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF		= BIT(3),
1426 	RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK		= BIT(4) | BIT(5),
1427 	RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC		= BIT(6),
1428 	RX_ENC_FLAG_BF			= BIT(7),
1429 };
1430 
1431 #define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT		4
1432 
1433 enum mac80211_rx_encoding {
1434 	RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0,
1435 	RX_ENC_HT,
1436 	RX_ENC_VHT,
1437 	RX_ENC_HE,
1438 };
1439 
1440 /**
1441  * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1442  *
1443  * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1444  * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
1445  * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
1446  *
1447  * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1448  * 	(TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
1449  * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is
1450  *	needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache.
1451  * @ack_tx_hwtstamp: Hardware timestamp for the ack TX in nanoseconds. Only
1452  *	needed for Timing measurement and Fine timing measurement action frames.
1453  *	Only reported by devices that have timestamping enabled.
1454  * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1455  *	it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
1456  * @band: the active band when this frame was received
1457  * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
1458  *	This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
1459  *	for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
1460  * @freq_offset: @freq has a positive offset of 500Khz.
1461  * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1462  *	unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1463  *	@IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
1464  * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1465  *	values were filled.
1466  * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1467  *	support dB or unspecified units)
1468  * @antenna: antenna used
1469  * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
1470  *	HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
1471  * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only)
1472  * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\*
1473  * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding
1474  * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw
1475  * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags
1476  * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc
1477  * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi
1478  * @he_dcm: HE DCM value
1479  * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
1480  * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1481  *	each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1482  * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
1483  * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU
1484  * @link_valid: if the link which is identified by @link_id is valid. This flag
1485  *	is set only when connection is MLO.
1486  * @link_id: id of the link used to receive the packet. This is used along with
1487  *	@link_valid.
1488  */
1489 struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1490 	u64 mactime;
1491 	union {
1492 		u64 boottime_ns;
1493 		ktime_t ack_tx_hwtstamp;
1494 	};
1495 	u32 device_timestamp;
1496 	u32 ampdu_reference;
1497 	u32 flag;
1498 	u16 freq: 13, freq_offset: 1;
1499 	u8 enc_flags;
1500 	u8 encoding:2, bw:3, he_ru:3;
1501 	u8 he_gi:2, he_dcm:1;
1502 	u8 rate_idx;
1503 	u8 nss;
1504 	u8 rx_flags;
1505 	u8 band;
1506 	u8 antenna;
1507 	s8 signal;
1508 	u8 chains;
1509 	s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
1510 	u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
1511 	u8 zero_length_psdu_type;
1512 	u8 link_valid:1, link_id:4;
1513 };
1514 
1515 static inline u32
ieee80211_rx_status_to_khz(struct ieee80211_rx_status * rx_status)1516 ieee80211_rx_status_to_khz(struct ieee80211_rx_status *rx_status)
1517 {
1518 	return MHZ_TO_KHZ(rx_status->freq) +
1519 	       (rx_status->freq_offset ? 500 : 0);
1520 }
1521 
1522 /**
1523  * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1524  * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1525  *	(this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1526  *	 bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1527  * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1528  *	alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1529  *	description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1530  *	Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1531  * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1532  * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1533  * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1534  *	then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1535  *	@data field.
1536  * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1537  *	the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1538  *	length
1539  * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1540  *
1541  * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1542  * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1543  * data.
1544  */
1545 struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1546 	u32 present;
1547 	u8 align;
1548 	u8 oui[3];
1549 	u8 subns;
1550 	u8 pad;
1551 	u16 len;
1552 	u8 data[];
1553 } __packed;
1554 
1555 /**
1556  * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1557  *
1558  * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1559  *
1560  * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1561  *	to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1562  *	or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
1563  * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1564  *	This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1565  *	meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1566  *	transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1567  *	Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1568  *	driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1569  *	for more.
1570  * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1571  *	the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1572  *	may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1573  *	be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1574  *	it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
1575  * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1576  *	operating channel.
1577  */
1578 enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
1579 	IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR		= (1<<0),
1580 	IEEE80211_CONF_PS		= (1<<1),
1581 	IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE		= (1<<2),
1582 	IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL	= (1<<3),
1583 };
1584 
1585 
1586 /**
1587  * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1588  *
1589  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
1590  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
1591  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
1592  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
1593  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
1594  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
1595  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
1596  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
1597  *	Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1598  *	otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1599  */
1600 enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
1601 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS		= BIT(1),
1602 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL	= BIT(2),
1603 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR		= BIT(3),
1604 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS		= BIT(4),
1605 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER		= BIT(5),
1606 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL		= BIT(6),
1607 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS	= BIT(7),
1608 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE		= BIT(8),
1609 };
1610 
1611 /**
1612  * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1613  *
1614  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1615  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1616  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1617  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1618  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
1619  */
1620 enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1621 	IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1622 	IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1623 	IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1624 	IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1625 
1626 	/* keep last */
1627 	IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1628 };
1629 
1630 /**
1631  * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1632  *
1633  * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1634  *
1635  * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1636  *
1637  * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
1638  * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1639  *	in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1640  *	has been received and the DTIM period is known.
1641  * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1642  *	powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1643  *	the CONF_PS flag is set.
1644  *
1645  * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1646  *	value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
1647  *
1648  * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
1649  * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
1650  *
1651  * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
1652  *	(a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1653  *	but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
1654  * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
1655  *	frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1656  *	number of transmissions not the number of retries
1657  *
1658  * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1659  *	%IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
1660  *	configured for an HT channel.
1661  *	Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1662  *	otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1663  */
1664 struct ieee80211_conf {
1665 	u32 flags;
1666 	int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
1667 
1668 	u16 listen_interval;
1669 	u8 ps_dtim_period;
1670 
1671 	u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1672 
1673 	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1674 	bool radar_enabled;
1675 	enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
1676 };
1677 
1678 /**
1679  * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1680  *
1681  * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1682  * operation.
1683  *
1684  * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1685  *	Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1686  *	announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1687  *	the driver passed into mac80211.
1688  * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1689  *	rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
1690  * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1691  *	scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
1692  * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
1693  * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1694  * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in
1695   *	current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new
1696   *	channel, expressed in TU.
1697  */
1698 struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1699 	u64 timestamp;
1700 	u32 device_timestamp;
1701 	bool block_tx;
1702 	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1703 	u8 count;
1704 	u32 delay;
1705 };
1706 
1707 /**
1708  * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1709  *
1710  * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1711  *	on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
1712  * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1713  *	monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1714  *	connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1715  *	provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
1716  * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1717  *	interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1718  *	but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1719  *	only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
1720  * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1721  *	and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1722  *	this is not pure P2P vif.
1723  */
1724 enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1725 	IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER		= BIT(0),
1726 	IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI		= BIT(1),
1727 	IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD		= BIT(2),
1728 	IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE		= BIT(3),
1729 };
1730 
1731 
1732 /**
1733  * enum ieee80211_offload_flags - virtual interface offload flags
1734  *
1735  * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED: tx encapsulation offload is enabled
1736  *	The driver supports sending frames passed as 802.3 frames by mac80211.
1737  *	It must also support sending 802.11 packets for the same interface.
1738  * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR: support 4-address mode encapsulation offload
1739  * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED: rx encapsulation offload is enabled
1740  *	The driver supports passing received 802.11 frames as 802.3 frames to
1741  *	mac80211.
1742  */
1743 
1744 enum ieee80211_offload_flags {
1745 	IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED		= BIT(0),
1746 	IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR		= BIT(1),
1747 	IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED		= BIT(2),
1748 };
1749 
1750 /**
1751  * struct ieee80211_vif_cfg - interface configuration
1752  * @assoc: association status
1753  * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS or not
1754  * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
1755  * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
1756  *	offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
1757  * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
1758  * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
1759  *	may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
1760  *	The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
1761  *	to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
1762  * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
1763  *	may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
1764  *	array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
1765  * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
1766  * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
1767  * @s1g: BSS is S1G BSS (affects Association Request format).
1768  * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
1769  *	hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
1770  *	your driver/device needs to do.
1771  * @ap_addr: AP MLD address, or BSSID for non-MLO connections
1772  *	(station mode only)
1773  */
1774 struct ieee80211_vif_cfg {
1775 	/* association related data */
1776 	bool assoc, ibss_joined;
1777 	bool ibss_creator;
1778 	bool ps;
1779 	u16 aid;
1780 
1781 	__be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
1782 	int arp_addr_cnt;
1783 	u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
1784 	size_t ssid_len;
1785 	bool s1g;
1786 	bool idle;
1787 	u8 ap_addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
1788 };
1789 
1790 /**
1791  * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1792  *
1793  * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1794  * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1795  *
1796  * @type: type of this virtual interface
1797  * @cfg: vif configuration, see &struct ieee80211_vif_cfg
1798  * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1799  *	or the BSS we're associated to
1800  * @link_conf: in case of MLD, the per-link BSS configuration,
1801  *	indexed by link ID
1802  * @valid_links: bitmap of valid links, or 0 for non-MLO.
1803  * @active_links: The bitmap of active links, or 0 for non-MLO.
1804  *	The driver shouldn't change this directly, but use the
1805  *	API calls meant for that purpose.
1806  * @addr: address of this interface
1807  * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1808  *	interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
1809  * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1810  *	these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1811  *	or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1812  *	at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
1813  * @offload_flags: hardware offload capabilities/flags for this interface.
1814  *	These are initialized by mac80211 before calling .add_interface,
1815  *	.change_interface or .update_vif_offload and updated by the driver
1816  *	within these ops, based on supported features or runtime change
1817  *	restrictions.
1818  * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1819  * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
1820  * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
1821  *	interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
1822  *	monitor interface (if that is requested.)
1823  * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1824  *	interface.
1825  * @rx_mcast_action_reg: multicast Action frames should be reported to mac80211
1826  *	for this interface.
1827  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1828  *	sizeof(void \*).
1829  * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
1830  * @offload_flags: 802.3 -> 802.11 enapsulation offload flags, see
1831  *	&enum ieee80211_offload_flags.
1832  * @mbssid_tx_vif: Pointer to the transmitting interface if MBSSID is enabled.
1833  */
1834 struct ieee80211_vif {
1835 	enum nl80211_iftype type;
1836 	struct ieee80211_vif_cfg cfg;
1837 	struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
1838 	struct ieee80211_bss_conf __rcu *link_conf[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS];
1839 	u16 valid_links, active_links;
1840 	u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
1841 	bool p2p;
1842 
1843 	u8 cab_queue;
1844 	u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1845 
1846 	struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1847 
1848 	u32 driver_flags;
1849 	u32 offload_flags;
1850 
1851 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1852 	struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1853 #endif
1854 
1855 	bool probe_req_reg;
1856 	bool rx_mcast_action_reg;
1857 
1858 	struct ieee80211_vif *mbssid_tx_vif;
1859 
1860 	/* must be last */
1861 	u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1862 };
1863 
1864 #define for_each_vif_active_link(vif, link, link_id)				\
1865 	for (link_id = 0; link_id < ARRAY_SIZE((vif)->link_conf); link_id++)	\
1866 		if ((!(vif)->active_links ||					\
1867 		     (vif)->active_links & BIT(link_id)) &&			\
1868 		    (link = rcu_dereference((vif)->link_conf[link_id])))
1869 
ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif * vif)1870 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1871 {
1872 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
1873 	return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
1874 #endif
1875 	return false;
1876 }
1877 
1878 /**
1879  * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1880  * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1881  *
1882  * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1883  * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1884  *
1885  * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1886  * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1887  * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1888  */
1889 struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1890 
1891 /**
1892  * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1893  * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1894  *
1895  * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1896  * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1897  * This can also be useful to get the netdev associated to a vif.
1898  */
1899 struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1900 
1901 /**
1902  * lockdep_vif_mutex_held - for lockdep checks on link poiners
1903  * @vif: the interface to check
1904  */
lockdep_vif_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_vif * vif)1905 static inline bool lockdep_vif_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1906 {
1907 	return lockdep_is_held(&ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(vif)->mtx);
1908 }
1909 
1910 #define link_conf_dereference_protected(vif, link_id)		\
1911 	rcu_dereference_protected((vif)->link_conf[link_id],	\
1912 				  lockdep_vif_mutex_held(vif))
1913 
1914 /**
1915  * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1916  *
1917  * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1918  * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1919  *
1920  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1921  *	driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
1922  *	particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1923  *	will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
1924  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1925  *	the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1926  *	generation in software.
1927  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1928  *	that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
1929  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
1930  *	CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1931  *	(MFP) to be done in software.
1932  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
1933  *	if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
1934  *	itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
1935  *	@IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1936  *	not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1937  *	MIC.
1938  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1939  *	management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1940  *	crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1941  *	properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1942  *	fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1943  *	RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1944  *	%IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
1945  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
1946  *	driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
1947  *	only for management frames (MFP).
1948  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1949  *	driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1950  *	be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
1951  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for
1952  *	a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with
1953  *	@IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key.
1954  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation.
1955  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE: This flag should be set by the driver
1956  *	for a AES_CMAC key to indicate that it requires sequence number
1957  *	generation only
1958  */
1959 enum ieee80211_key_flags {
1960 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT	= BIT(0),
1961 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV		= BIT(1),
1962 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC	= BIT(2),
1963 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE		= BIT(3),
1964 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX		= BIT(4),
1965 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE		= BIT(5),
1966 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT		= BIT(6),
1967 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM	= BIT(7),
1968 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE	= BIT(8),
1969 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX		= BIT(9),
1970 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE	= BIT(10),
1971 };
1972 
1973 /**
1974  * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1975  *
1976  * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1977  * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1978  *
1979  * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1980  *	wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
1981  *	encrypted in hardware.
1982  * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
1983  * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
1984  *	needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
1985  * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1986  * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1987  * @keylen: key material length
1988  * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1989  * 	data block:
1990  * 	- Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1991  * 	- Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1992  * 	- Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
1993  * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1994  * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
1995  * @link_id: the link ID for MLO, or -1 for non-MLO or pairwise keys
1996  */
1997 struct ieee80211_key_conf {
1998 	atomic64_t tx_pn;
1999 	u32 cipher;
2000 	u8 icv_len;
2001 	u8 iv_len;
2002 	u8 hw_key_idx;
2003 	s8 keyidx;
2004 	u16 flags;
2005 	s8 link_id;
2006 	u8 keylen;
2007 	u8 key[];
2008 };
2009 
2010 #define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN	16
2011 
2012 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
2013 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))
2014 
2015 /**
2016  * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
2017  *
2018  * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
2019  * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
2020  *	reverse order than in packet)
2021  * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
2022  *	reverse order than in packet)
2023  * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
2024  *	reverse order than in packet)
2025  * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
2026  *	reverse order than in packet)
2027  * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
2028  */
2029 struct ieee80211_key_seq {
2030 	union {
2031 		struct {
2032 			u32 iv32;
2033 			u16 iv16;
2034 		} tkip;
2035 		struct {
2036 			u8 pn[6];
2037 		} ccmp;
2038 		struct {
2039 			u8 pn[6];
2040 		} aes_cmac;
2041 		struct {
2042 			u8 pn[6];
2043 		} aes_gmac;
2044 		struct {
2045 			u8 pn[6];
2046 		} gcmp;
2047 		struct {
2048 			u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
2049 			u8 seq_len;
2050 		} hw;
2051 	};
2052 };
2053 
2054 /**
2055  * enum set_key_cmd - key command
2056  *
2057  * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
2058  * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
2059  *
2060  * @SET_KEY: a key is set
2061  * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
2062  */
2063 enum set_key_cmd {
2064 	SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
2065 };
2066 
2067 /**
2068  * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
2069  *
2070  * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
2071  *	this is a special state for add/remove transitions
2072  * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
2073  * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
2074  * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
2075  * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
2076  */
2077 enum ieee80211_sta_state {
2078 	/* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
2079 	IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
2080 	IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
2081 	IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
2082 	IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
2083 	IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
2084 };
2085 
2086 /**
2087  * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
2088  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
2089  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
2090  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
2091  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
2092  *	(including 80+80 MHz)
2093  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320: station can receive up to 320 MHz
2094  *
2095  * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
2096  *	correctly, the values must be sorted.
2097  */
2098 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
2099 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
2100 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
2101 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
2102 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
2103 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320,
2104 };
2105 
2106 /**
2107  * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
2108  *
2109  * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
2110  * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
2111  *	Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
2112  */
2113 struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
2114 	struct rcu_head rcu_head;
2115 	struct {
2116 		s8 idx;
2117 		u8 count;
2118 		u8 count_cts;
2119 		u8 count_rts;
2120 		u16 flags;
2121 	} rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
2122 };
2123 
2124 /**
2125  * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration
2126  *
2127  * Used to configure txpower for station.
2128  *
2129  * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames
2130  *	to the STA.
2131  * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power
2132  *	will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC
2133  *	%type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power.
2134  *	NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for
2135  *	per peer TPC.
2136  */
2137 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr {
2138 	s16 power;
2139 	enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type;
2140 };
2141 
2142 /**
2143  * struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates - info that is aggregated from active links
2144  *
2145  * Used for any per-link data that needs to be aggregated and updated in the
2146  * main &struct ieee80211_sta when updated or the active links change.
2147  *
2148  * @max_amsdu_len: indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes.
2149  *	This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble.
2150  *	For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
2151  *
2152  *	* If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
2153  *	  A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
2154  *	* If the skb is not part of a BA agreement, the A-MSDU maximal
2155  *	  size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
2156  *
2157  * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level
2158  * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section
2159  * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2).
2160  * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control.
2161  * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID
2162  */
2163 struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates {
2164 	u16 max_amsdu_len;
2165 
2166 	u16 max_rc_amsdu_len;
2167 	u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
2168 };
2169 
2170 /**
2171  * struct ieee80211_link_sta - station Link specific info
2172  * All link specific info for a STA link for a non MLD STA(single)
2173  * or a MLD STA(multiple entries) are stored here.
2174  *
2175  * @addr: MAC address of the Link STA. For non-MLO STA this is same as the addr
2176  *	in ieee80211_sta. For MLO Link STA this addr can be same or different
2177  *	from addr in ieee80211_sta (representing MLD STA addr)
2178  * @link_id: the link ID for this link STA (0 for deflink)
2179  * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
2180  * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates
2181  * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
2182  * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
2183  * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA
2184  * @he_6ghz_capa: on 6 GHz, holds the HE 6 GHz band capabilities
2185  * @eht_cap: EHT capabilities of this STA
2186  * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
2187  * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
2188  *	station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
2189  *	notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
2190  *	the station moves to associated state.
2191  * @txpwr: the station tx power configuration
2192  *
2193  */
2194 struct ieee80211_link_sta {
2195 	u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
2196 	u8 link_id;
2197 	enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
2198 
2199 	u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
2200 	struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
2201 	struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
2202 	struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap;
2203 	struct ieee80211_he_6ghz_capa he_6ghz_capa;
2204 	struct ieee80211_sta_eht_cap eht_cap;
2205 
2206 	struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates agg;
2207 
2208 	u8 rx_nss;
2209 	enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
2210 	struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr;
2211 };
2212 
2213 /**
2214  * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
2215  *
2216  * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
2217  * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
2218  * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
2219  * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
2220  * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
2221  * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
2222  * This also represents the MLD STA in case of MLO association
2223  * and holds pointers to various link STA's
2224  *
2225  * @addr: MAC address
2226  * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
2227  * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU
2228  *	that this station is allowed to transmit to us.
2229  *	Can be modified by driver.
2230  * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
2231  *	otherwise always false)
2232  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
2233  *	sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information.
2234  * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
2235  *	if wme is supported. The bits order is like in
2236  *	IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*.
2237  * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
2238  * @rates: rate control selection table
2239  * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
2240  * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
2241  *	valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
2242  * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
2243  * @mlo: indicates whether the STA is MLO station.
2244  * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
2245  *	A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
2246  *	unlimited.
2247  * @cur: currently valid data as aggregated from the active links
2248  *	For non MLO STA it will point to the deflink data. For MLO STA
2249  *	ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates() must be called to update it.
2250  * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not.
2251  * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction); note that
2252  *	the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) is used for non-data frames
2253  * @deflink: This holds the default link STA information, for non MLO STA all link
2254  *	specific STA information is accessed through @deflink or through
2255  *	link[0] which points to address of @deflink. For MLO Link STA
2256  *	the first added link STA will point to deflink.
2257  * @link: reference to Link Sta entries. For Non MLO STA, except 1st link,
2258  *	i.e link[0] all links would be assigned to NULL by default and
2259  *	would access link information via @deflink or link[0]. For MLO
2260  *	STA, first link STA being added will point its link pointer to
2261  *	@deflink address and remaining would be allocated and the address
2262  *	would be assigned to link[link_id] where link_id is the id assigned
2263  *	by the AP.
2264  * @valid_links: bitmap of valid links, or 0 for non-MLO
2265  */
2266 struct ieee80211_sta {
2267 	u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
2268 	u16 aid;
2269 	u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2270 	bool wme;
2271 	u8 uapsd_queues;
2272 	u8 max_sp;
2273 	struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
2274 	bool tdls;
2275 	bool tdls_initiator;
2276 	bool mfp;
2277 	bool mlo;
2278 	u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
2279 
2280 	struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates *cur;
2281 
2282 	bool support_p2p_ps;
2283 
2284 	struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1];
2285 
2286 	u16 valid_links;
2287 	struct ieee80211_link_sta deflink;
2288 	struct ieee80211_link_sta __rcu *link[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS];
2289 
2290 	/* must be last */
2291 	u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2292 };
2293 
2294 #ifdef CONFIG_LOCKDEP
2295 bool lockdep_sta_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
2296 #else
lockdep_sta_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_sta * pubsta)2297 static inline bool lockdep_sta_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta)
2298 {
2299 	return true;
2300 }
2301 #endif
2302 
2303 #define link_sta_dereference_protected(sta, link_id)		\
2304 	rcu_dereference_protected((sta)->link[link_id],		\
2305 				  lockdep_sta_mutex_held(sta))
2306 
2307 #define for_each_sta_active_link(vif, sta, link_sta, link_id)			\
2308 	for (link_id = 0; link_id < ARRAY_SIZE((sta)->link); link_id++)		\
2309 		if ((!(vif)->active_links ||					\
2310 		     (vif)->active_links & BIT(link_id)) &&			\
2311 		    ((link_sta) = link_sta_dereference_protected(sta, link_id)))
2312 
2313 /**
2314  * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
2315  *
2316  * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
2317  * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
2318  *
2319  * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
2320  * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
2321  */
2322 enum sta_notify_cmd {
2323 	STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
2324 };
2325 
2326 /**
2327  * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
2328  *
2329  * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
2330  * 	it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
2331  */
2332 struct ieee80211_tx_control {
2333 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2334 };
2335 
2336 /**
2337  * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
2338  *
2339  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
2340  * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
2341  * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue),
2342  *	%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled)
2343  * @ac: the AC for this queue
2344  * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
2345  *
2346  * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
2347  * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
2348  */
2349 struct ieee80211_txq {
2350 	struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
2351 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2352 	u8 tid;
2353 	u8 ac;
2354 
2355 	/* must be last */
2356 	u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2357 };
2358 
2359 /**
2360  * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
2361  *
2362  * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
2363  * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
2364  * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
2365  * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
2366  * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
2367  *
2368  * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
2369  *	The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
2370  *	controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
2371  *	should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
2372  *	will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
2373  *	algorithm.
2374  *	Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
2375  *	callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
2376  *	the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
2377  *	@use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
2378  *	timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
2379  *	CCK frames.
2380  *
2381  * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
2382  *	Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
2383  *	the FCS at the end.
2384  *
2385  * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
2386  *	Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
2387  *	for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
2388  *	rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
2389  *	to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
2390  *	multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
2391  *	the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
2392  *
2393  * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
2394  *	Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
2395  *	expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
2396  *	If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
2397  *
2398  * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
2399  *	Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
2400  *	one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
2401  *	between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
2402  *
2403  * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
2404  * 	Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
2405  * 	Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
2406  *
2407  * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
2408  *	Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
2409  *
2410  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
2411  *	Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
2412  *
2413  * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
2414  *	Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
2415  *	stack support for dynamic PS.
2416  *
2417  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
2418  *	Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
2419  *
2420  * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
2421  *	Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
2422  *
2423  * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
2424  *	Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
2425  *	the stack.
2426  *
2427  * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
2428  *	The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
2429  *	periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
2430  *
2431  * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
2432  *	This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
2433  *	dtim_period).
2434  *
2435  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
2436  *	per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
2437  *	the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
2438  *	to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
2439  *	possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
2440  *	only in that case.
2441  *
2442  * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
2443  *	autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
2444  *	this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
2445  *	stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
2446  *	Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
2447  *	the PS mode of connected stations.
2448  *
2449  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
2450  *	setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
2451  *	software.
2452  *
2453  * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
2454  *	a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
2455  *	active interfaces.
2456  *
2457  * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
2458  *	be created.  It is expected user-space will create vifs as
2459  *	desired (and thus have them named as desired).
2460  *
2461  * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
2462  *	crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
2463  *	try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
2464  *	the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
2465  *	supported cipher suites.
2466  *
2467  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
2468  *	this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
2469  *	for frames.
2470  *
2471  * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
2472  *	queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
2473  *	for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
2474  *	control for more details.
2475  *
2476  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
2477  *	selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
2478  *
2479  * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
2480  *	P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
2481  *	is supported.
2482  *
2483  * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
2484  *	only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
2485  *
2486  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
2487  *	and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
2488  *	using aggregation for such frames.)
2489  *
2490  * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
2491  *	for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
2492  *	is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
2493  *	CSA frame.
2494  *
2495  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
2496  *	or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
2497  *
2498  * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
2499  *	in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
2500  *
2501  * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
2502  *	than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
2503  *
2504  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
2505  *	within A-MPDU.
2506  *
2507  * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
2508  *	for sent beacons.
2509  *
2510  * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
2511  *	station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
2512  *	by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
2513  *	from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
2514  *
2515  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
2516  *	reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
2517  *	order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
2518  *	timeout.
2519  *
2520  * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX,
2521  *	which implies using per-CPU station statistics.
2522  *
2523  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated
2524  *	A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support.
2525  *	When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must
2526  *	limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting
2527  *	max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta.
2528  *
2529  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list
2530  *	skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU.
2531  *
2532  * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event
2533  *	by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such
2534  *	drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver
2535  *	is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout.
2536  *
2537  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself.
2538  *	The stack will not do fragmentation.
2539  *	The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well.
2540  *
2541  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on
2542  *	TDLS links.
2543  *
2544  * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the
2545  *	mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a
2546  *	deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no
2547  *	beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the
2548  *	virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of
2549  *	the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the
2550  *	deauthentication frame might not be transmitted.
2551  *
2552  * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't
2553  *	support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug.
2554  *
2555  * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of
2556  *	course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with.
2557  *
2558  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT
2559  *	extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if
2560  *	the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW
2561  *	but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver.
2562  *	See also the documentation for that flag.
2563  *
2564  * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all
2565  *	MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use
2566  *	TXQs to start with.
2567  *
2568  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU
2569  *	length in tx status information
2570  *
2571  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2572  *
2573  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2574  *	only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set.
2575  *
2576  * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT: The card and driver is only
2577  *	aggregating MPDUs with the same keyid, allowing mac80211 to keep Tx
2578  *	A-MPDU sessions active while rekeying with Extended Key ID.
2579  *
2580  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports tx encapsulation
2581  *	offload
2582  *
2583  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports rx decapsulation
2584  *	offload
2585  *
2586  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP: Hardware supports concurrent rx
2587  *	decapsulation offload and passing raw 802.11 frames for monitor iface.
2588  *	If this is supported, the driver must pass both 802.3 frames for real
2589  *	usage and 802.11 frames with %RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR set for monitor to
2590  *	the stack.
2591  *
2592  * @IEEE80211_HW_DETECTS_COLOR_COLLISION: HW/driver has support for BSS color
2593  *	collision detection and doesn't need it in software.
2594  *
2595  * @IEEE80211_HW_MLO_MCAST_MULTI_LINK_TX: Hardware/driver handles transmitting
2596  *	multicast frames on all links, mac80211 should not do that.
2597  *
2598  * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
2599  */
2600 enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
2601 	IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
2602 	IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
2603 	IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
2604 	IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
2605 	IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
2606 	IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
2607 	IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
2608 	IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
2609 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
2610 	IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
2611 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
2612 	IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
2613 	IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
2614 	IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
2615 	IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
2616 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
2617 	IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
2618 	IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
2619 	IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
2620 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
2621 	IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
2622 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
2623 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
2624 	IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
2625 	IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
2626 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
2627 	IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
2628 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
2629 	IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
2630 	IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
2631 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
2632 	IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
2633 	IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
2634 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
2635 	IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS,
2636 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU,
2637 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST,
2638 	IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK,
2639 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG,
2640 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA,
2641 	IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP,
2642 	IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP,
2643 	IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ,
2644 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW,
2645 	IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ,
2646 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN,
2647 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID,
2648 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID,
2649 	IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT,
2650 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD,
2651 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD,
2652 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP,
2653 	IEEE80211_HW_DETECTS_COLOR_COLLISION,
2654 	IEEE80211_HW_MLO_MCAST_MULTI_LINK_TX,
2655 
2656 	/* keep last, obviously */
2657 	NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
2658 };
2659 
2660 /**
2661  * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
2662  *
2663  * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
2664  * information for an 802.11 PHY.
2665  *
2666  * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
2667  *	802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
2668  *	members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
2669  *	and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
2670  *	bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
2671  *
2672  * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
2673  *
2674  * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
2675  *	along with this structure.
2676  *
2677  * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
2678  *
2679  * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
2680  *	for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
2681  *
2682  * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
2683  *	Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
2684  *
2685  * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
2686  *	only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
2687  *
2688  * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
2689  *	that HW supports
2690  *
2691  * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
2692  *	data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
2693  *	queues need to have configurable access parameters.
2694  *
2695  * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
2696  *	If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
2697  *	set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
2698  *
2699  * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2700  *	within &struct ieee80211_vif.
2701  * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2702  *	within &struct ieee80211_sta.
2703  * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2704  *	within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
2705  * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2706  *	within @struct ieee80211_txq.
2707  *
2708  * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2709  *	can handle.
2710  * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2711  *	the hw can report back.
2712  * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
2713  *
2714  * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2715  *	sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2716  *	aggregation.
2717  *	This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2718  *	number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2719  *	it shouldn't be set.
2720  *
2721  * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
2722  *	aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll
2723  *	advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if
2724  *	the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N
2725  *	with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012).
2726  *	For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used.
2727  *
2728  * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum
2729  *	of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list.
2730  *
2731  * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2732  *	(if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
2733  *
2734  * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2735  *	reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
2736  *	include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only
2737  *	adding _BW is supported today.
2738  *
2739  * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2740  *	the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
2741  *	Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values.
2742  *
2743  * @radiotap_he: HE radiotap validity flags
2744  *
2745  * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the
2746  *	@units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp
2747  *	field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status
2748  *	device_timestamp.
2749  * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a
2750  *	IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a
2751  *	IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value.
2752  * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the
2753  *	radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set.
2754  *
2755  * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
2756  *	from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2757  *	other features will be rejected during HW registration.
2758  *
2759  * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2760  *	for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2761  *	enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2762  *	Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2763  *	that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2764  *	neither enabled.
2765  *
2766  * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2767  *	deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2768  *	Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
2769  *
2770  * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the
2771  *	device.
2772  *
2773  * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from
2774  *	them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed,
2775  *	unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers.
2776  *
2777  * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while
2778  *	refilling deficit of each TXQ.
2779  *
2780  * @max_mtu: the max mtu could be set.
2781  *
2782  * @tx_power_levels: a list of power levels supported by the wifi hardware.
2783  * 	The power levels can be specified either as integer or fractions.
2784  * 	The power level at idx 0 shall be the maximum positive power level.
2785  *
2786  * @max_txpwr_levels_idx: the maximum valid idx of 'tx_power_levels' list.
2787  */
2788 struct ieee80211_hw {
2789 	struct ieee80211_conf conf;
2790 	struct wiphy *wiphy;
2791 	const char *rate_control_algorithm;
2792 	void *priv;
2793 	unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
2794 	unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
2795 	unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
2796 	int vif_data_size;
2797 	int sta_data_size;
2798 	int chanctx_data_size;
2799 	int txq_data_size;
2800 	u16 queues;
2801 	u16 max_listen_interval;
2802 	s8 max_signal;
2803 	u8 max_rates;
2804 	u8 max_report_rates;
2805 	u8 max_rate_tries;
2806 	u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2807 	u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
2808 	u8 max_tx_fragments;
2809 	u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
2810 	u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
2811 	u16 radiotap_vht_details;
2812 	struct {
2813 		int units_pos;
2814 		s16 accuracy;
2815 	} radiotap_timestamp;
2816 	netdev_features_t netdev_features;
2817 	u8 uapsd_queues;
2818 	u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
2819 	u8 max_nan_de_entries;
2820 	u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift;
2821 	u8 weight_multiplier;
2822 	u32 max_mtu;
2823 	const s8 *tx_power_levels;
2824 	u8 max_txpwr_levels_idx;
2825 };
2826 
_ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)2827 static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2828 				       enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2829 {
2830 	return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2831 }
2832 #define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg)	_ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2833 
_ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)2834 static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2835 				     enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2836 {
2837 	return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2838 }
2839 #define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg)	_ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2840 
2841 /**
2842  * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2843  *
2844  * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2845  * @req: cfg80211 request.
2846  */
2847 struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2848 	struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2849 
2850 	/* Keep last */
2851 	struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2852 };
2853 
2854 /**
2855  * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2856  *
2857  * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2858  * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2859  * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2860  * @status: channel-switch response status
2861  * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2862  * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2863  * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2864  * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2865  * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2866  */
2867 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2868 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2869 	struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2870 	u8 action_code;
2871 	u32 status;
2872 	u32 timestamp;
2873 	u16 switch_time;
2874 	u16 switch_timeout;
2875 	struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2876 	u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2877 };
2878 
2879 /**
2880  * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2881  *
2882  * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2883  *
2884  * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2885  * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2886  * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2887  * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2888  * is already used internally by mac80211.
2889  *
2890  * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
2891  */
2892 struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2893 
2894 /**
2895  * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2896  *
2897  * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2898  * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2899  */
SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct device * dev)2900 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2901 {
2902 	set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2903 }
2904 
2905 /**
2906  * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
2907  *
2908  * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2909  * @addr: the address to set
2910  */
SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,const u8 * addr)2911 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
2912 {
2913 	memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2914 }
2915 
2916 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw * hw,const struct ieee80211_tx_info * c)2917 ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2918 		      const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2919 {
2920 	if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
2921 		return NULL;
2922 	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
2923 }
2924 
2925 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw * hw,const struct ieee80211_tx_info * c)2926 ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2927 			   const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2928 {
2929 	if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
2930 		return NULL;
2931 	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
2932 }
2933 
2934 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw * hw,const struct ieee80211_tx_info * c,int idx)2935 ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2936 			     const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
2937 {
2938 	if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
2939 		return NULL;
2940 	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
2941 }
2942 
2943 /**
2944  * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2945  * @hw: the hardware
2946  * @skb: the skb
2947  *
2948  * Free a transmit skb. Use this function when some failure
2949  * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2950  */
2951 void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2952 
2953 /**
2954  * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
2955  *
2956  * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2957  * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2958  *
2959  * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2960  * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
2961  * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2962  * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2963  * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
2964  * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2965  * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2966  *
2967  * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2968  * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2969  * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2970  *
2971  * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2972  * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2973  * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2974  * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2975  *
2976  * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2977  * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2978  * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2979  * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2980  *
2981  * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2982  *
2983  * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2984  * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2985  * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2986  * based on the receive flags.
2987  *
2988  * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2989  * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2990  * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2991  * keys.
2992  *
2993  * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2994  * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2995  * handler.
2996  * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
2997  * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
2998  * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2999  * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
3000  * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
3001  * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
3002  *
3003  * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
3004  * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
3005  * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
3006  *
3007  * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag
3008  * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to the following
3009  * requirements:
3010  * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to mac80211
3011       once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been completed,
3012    2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued
3013       at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits),
3014    3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command
3015       encrypted with the new key when also needing
3016       @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV and
3017    4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted.
3018    Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver.
3019  */
3020 
3021 /**
3022  * DOC: Powersave support
3023  *
3024  * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
3025  *
3026  * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
3027  * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
3028  * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
3029  * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
3030  * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
3031  * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
3032  * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
3033  * it finds traffic directed to it.
3034  *
3035  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
3036  * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
3037  * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
3038  * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
3039  * back to sleep at appropriate times.
3040  *
3041  * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
3042  * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
3043  * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
3044  *
3045  * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
3046  * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
3047  * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
3048  * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
3049  * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
3050  * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
3051  * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
3052  *
3053  * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
3054  * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
3055  * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
3056  * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
3057  * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
3058  * periods.
3059  *
3060  * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
3061  * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
3062  * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
3063  * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
3064  * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
3065  * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
3066  * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
3067  * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
3068  * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
3069  * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
3070  *
3071  * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
3072  * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
3073  * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
3074  * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
3075  * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
3076  * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
3077  *
3078  * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
3079  * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
3080  */
3081 
3082 /**
3083  * DOC: Beacon filter support
3084  *
3085  * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
3086  * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
3087  * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
3088  * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
3089  * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
3090  * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
3091  * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
3092  *
3093  * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
3094  * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
3095  * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
3096  * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
3097  * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
3098  *
3099  * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
3100  * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
3101  * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
3102  * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
3103  *
3104  * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
3105  * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
3106  * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
3107  * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
3108  *
3109  *  - a list of information element IDs
3110  *  - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
3111  *
3112  * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
3113  * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
3114  * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
3115  * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
3116  * vendor information elements.
3117  *
3118  * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
3119  * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
3120  *
3121  * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
3122  * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
3123  * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
3124  * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
3125  * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
3126  * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
3127  *
3128  *
3129  * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
3130  * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
3131  * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
3132  * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
3133  * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
3134  * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
3135  * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
3136  * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
3137  *
3138  * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
3139  * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
3140  * signal strength threshold checking.
3141  */
3142 
3143 /**
3144  * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
3145  *
3146  * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
3147  * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
3148  * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
3149  * "11.2.3 SM power save".
3150  *
3151  * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
3152  * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
3153  * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
3154  * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
3155  * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
3156  * hardware flags.
3157  *
3158  * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
3159  * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
3160  * turned off otherwise.
3161  *
3162  * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
3163  * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
3164  * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
3165  * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
3166  */
3167 
3168 /**
3169  * DOC: Frame filtering
3170  *
3171  * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
3172  * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
3173  * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
3174  * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
3175  * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
3176  *
3177  * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
3178  * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
3179  * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
3180  *
3181  * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
3182  * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
3183  * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
3184  * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
3185  * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
3186  * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
3187  * @total_flags with the new flag states.
3188  *
3189  * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
3190  * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
3191  * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
3192  * or dropped.
3193  *
3194  * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
3195  * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
3196  * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
3197  * the flag, but not clear it.
3198  * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
3199  * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
3200  * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
3201  * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
3202  * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
3203  * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
3204  * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
3205  * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
3206  */
3207 
3208 /**
3209  * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
3210  *
3211  * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
3212  * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
3213  * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
3214  *
3215  * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
3216  * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
3217  * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
3218  * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
3219  * the driver code.
3220  *
3221  * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
3222  * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
3223  * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
3224  * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
3225  * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
3226  * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
3227  * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
3228  *
3229  * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
3230  * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
3231  * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
3232  * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
3233  * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
3234  * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
3235  * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
3236  * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
3237  * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
3238  * @sta_notify callback.
3239  *
3240  * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
3241  * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
3242  * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
3243  * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
3244  * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
3245  * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
3246  * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
3247  * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
3248  * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
3249  * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
3250  * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
3251  * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
3252  * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
3253  * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
3254  *
3255  * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
3256  * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
3257  *
3258  * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
3259  * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
3260  * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
3261  * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
3262  * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
3263  * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
3264  * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
3265  * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
3266  * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
3267  * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
3268  * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
3269  *
3270  * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
3271  * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
3272  * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
3273  * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
3274  * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
3275  * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
3276  * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
3277  * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
3278  * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
3279  * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
3280  * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
3281  * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
3282  * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
3283  * buffers for those TIDs contain.
3284  *
3285  * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
3286  * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
3287  * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
3288  * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
3289  * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
3290  * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
3291  * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
3292  *
3293  * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
3294  * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
3295  * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
3296  * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
3297  * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
3298  *
3299  * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
3300  * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
3301  * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
3302  * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
3303  */
3304 
3305 /**
3306  * DOC: HW queue control
3307  *
3308  * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
3309  * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
3310  * was problematic for a few reasons:
3311  * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
3312  * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
3313  * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
3314  *
3315  * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
3316  * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
3317  * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
3318  *
3319  * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
3320  * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
3321  * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
3322  * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
3323  * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
3324  * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
3325  * the hardware queue.
3326  * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
3327  * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
3328  *
3329  * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
3330  * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
3331  * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
3332  * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
3333  * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
3334  *
3335  * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
3336  * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
3337  * after-DTIM queue for AP:   8
3338  * off-channel queue:         9
3339  *
3340  * It would then set up the hardware like this:
3341  *   hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
3342  *
3343  * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
3344  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
3345  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
3346  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
3347  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
3348  *   vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3349  * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
3350  *
3351  * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
3352  * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
3353  *
3354  * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3355  * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
3356  * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
3357  * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
3358  */
3359 
3360 /**
3361  * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
3362  *
3363  * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
3364  * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
3365  * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
3366  * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
3367  *
3368  * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
3369  *	by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
3370  *	multicast address.
3371  *
3372  * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
3373  *	%RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
3374  *
3375  * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
3376  *	the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
3377  *
3378  * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
3379  *	to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
3380  *	by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
3381  *	mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
3382  *	honour this flag if possible.
3383  *
3384  * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
3385  *	station
3386  *
3387  * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
3388  *
3389  * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
3390  *
3391  * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
3392  *
3393  * @FIF_MCAST_ACTION: pass multicast Action frames
3394  */
3395 enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
3396 	FIF_ALLMULTI		= 1<<1,
3397 	FIF_FCSFAIL		= 1<<2,
3398 	FIF_PLCPFAIL		= 1<<3,
3399 	FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC	= 1<<4,
3400 	FIF_CONTROL		= 1<<5,
3401 	FIF_OTHER_BSS		= 1<<6,
3402 	FIF_PSPOLL		= 1<<7,
3403 	FIF_PROBE_REQ		= 1<<8,
3404 	FIF_MCAST_ACTION	= 1<<9,
3405 };
3406 
3407 /**
3408  * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
3409  *
3410  * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
3411  * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
3412  *
3413  * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
3414  * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
3415  * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
3416  * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
3417  *
3418  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
3419  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
3420  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation, the driver must either
3421  *	call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() or
3422  *	call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() with status
3423  *	%IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA to delay addba after
3424  *	ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe is called, or just return the special
3425  *	status %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE.
3426  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
3427  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
3428  *	queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
3429  *	driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
3430  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
3431  *	called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
3432  *	ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
3433  *	session is gone and removes the station.
3434  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
3435  *	but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
3436  *	now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
3437  *	should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
3438  */
3439 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
3440 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
3441 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
3442 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
3443 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
3444 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
3445 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
3446 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
3447 };
3448 
3449 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE 1
3450 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA 2
3451 
3452 /**
3453  * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
3454  *
3455  * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3456  * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
3457  * @tid: tid of the BA session
3458  * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
3459  *	action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
3460  *	actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
3461  * @buf_size: reorder buffer size  (number of subframes). Valid only when the
3462  *	action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
3463  *	%IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3464  * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
3465  *	valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3466  * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
3467  *	%IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
3468  */
3469 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
3470 	enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
3471 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
3472 	u16 tid;
3473 	u16 ssn;
3474 	u16 buf_size;
3475 	bool amsdu;
3476 	u16 timeout;
3477 };
3478 
3479 /**
3480  * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
3481  * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
3482  * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
3483  *	frame received on trigger-enabled AC
3484  */
3485 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
3486 	IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
3487 	IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
3488 };
3489 
3490 /**
3491  * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
3492  *
3493  * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
3494  *	to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
3495  *	information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
3496  *	flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
3497  * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
3498  * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
3499  *	changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
3500  *	the peer.
3501  * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
3502  *	by the peer
3503  */
3504 enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
3505 	IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED		= BIT(0),
3506 	IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED	= BIT(1),
3507 	IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED	= BIT(2),
3508 	IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED	= BIT(3),
3509 };
3510 
3511 /**
3512  * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
3513  *
3514  * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
3515  * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
3516  * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vice versa).
3517  * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
3518  * operations compared to other operations/flows.
3519  *
3520  * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
3521  * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
3522  *	for sending management frames offchannel.
3523  */
3524 enum ieee80211_roc_type {
3525 	IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
3526 	IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
3527 };
3528 
3529 /**
3530  * enum ieee80211_reconfig_type - reconfig type
3531  *
3532  * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
3533  * reconfiguration type was completed.
3534  *
3535  * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
3536  *	(also due to resume() callback returning 1)
3537  * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
3538  *	of wowlan configuration)
3539  */
3540 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
3541 	IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
3542 	IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
3543 };
3544 
3545 /**
3546  * struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info - prepare TX information
3547  * @duration: if non-zero, hint about the required duration,
3548  *	only used with the mgd_prepare_tx() method.
3549  * @subtype: frame subtype (auth, (re)assoc, deauth, disassoc)
3550  * @success: whether the frame exchange was successful, only
3551  *	used with the mgd_complete_tx() method, and then only
3552  *	valid for auth and (re)assoc.
3553  */
3554 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info {
3555 	u16 duration;
3556 	u16 subtype;
3557 	u8 success:1;
3558 };
3559 
3560 /**
3561  * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
3562  *
3563  * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
3564  * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
3565  * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
3566  *
3567  * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
3568  *	skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
3569  *	The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
3570  *	configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
3571  *	preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
3572  *	Must be atomic.
3573  *
3574  * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
3575  *	is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
3576  *	frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
3577  *	Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
3578  *	or zero.
3579  *	When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
3580  *	to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
3581  *	is added.
3582  *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3583  *
3584  * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
3585  *	is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
3586  *	it must turn off frame reception.)
3587  *	May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
3588  *	an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
3589  *	you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
3590  *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3591  *
3592  * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
3593  *	stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
3594  *	ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
3595  *	configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
3596  *	reconfigured at resume time.
3597  *	The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
3598  *	wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
3599  *	supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
3600  *	must return 1 from this function.
3601  *
3602  * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
3603  *	now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
3604  *	functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
3605  *	to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
3606  *	will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
3607  *
3608  * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
3609  *	modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
3610  *	supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
3611  *	in suspend().
3612  *
3613  * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
3614  *	enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
3615  *	and @stop must be implemented.
3616  *	The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
3617  *	the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
3618  *	interface is given in the conf parameter.
3619  *	The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
3620  *	negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
3621  *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3622  *
3623  * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
3624  *	is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
3625  *	switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
3626  *	Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
3627  *	found by the interface iteration callbacks.
3628  *
3629  * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
3630  *	The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
3631  *	and no monitor interfaces are present.
3632  *	When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
3633  *	must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
3634  *	the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
3635  *	MAC address of the device going away.
3636  *	Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
3637  *
3638  * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
3639  *	function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
3640  *	This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
3641  *	if it does. The callback can sleep.
3642  *
3643  * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
3644  *	parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
3645  *	level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
3646  *	This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
3647  *	for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
3648  *	of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
3649  *	can sleep.
3650  *	Note: this callback is called if @vif_cfg_changed or @link_info_changed
3651  *	are not implemented.
3652  *
3653  * @vif_cfg_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to interface
3654  *	(MLD) parameters from &struct ieee80211_vif_cfg that vary during the
3655  *	lifetime of the interface (e.g. assoc status, IP addresses, etc.)
3656  *	The @changed parameter indicates which value changed.
3657  *	The callback can sleep.
3658  *
3659  * @link_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to link
3660  *	parameters from &struct ieee80211_bss_conf that are related to an
3661  *	individual link. e.g. legacy/HT/VHT/... rate information.
3662  *	The @changed parameter indicates which value changed, and the @link_id
3663  *	parameter indicates the link ID. Note that the @link_id will be 0 for
3664  *	non-MLO connections.
3665  *	The callback can sleep.
3666  *
3667  * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
3668  *	This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
3669  *	to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
3670  *
3671  * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
3672  *	See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
3673  *	This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
3674  *
3675  * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
3676  *	This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
3677  *	should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
3678  *	of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
3679  *	which flags are changed.
3680  *	This callback can sleep.
3681  *
3682  * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
3683  * 	must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
3684  *
3685  * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3686  *	This callback is only called between add_interface and
3687  *	remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
3688  *	is enabled.
3689  *	Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
3690  *	The callback can sleep.
3691  *
3692  * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3693  * 	This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
3694  * 	which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
3695  *	The callback must be atomic.
3696  *
3697  * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
3698  *	host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
3699  *	necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
3700  *	After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
3701  *	userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
3702  *
3703  * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
3704  *	WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
3705  *	offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
3706  *
3707  * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
3708  *	the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
3709  *	configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
3710  *	registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
3711  *	that power save is disabled.
3712  *	The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
3713  *	entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
3714  *	at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
3715  *	(extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
3716  *	When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
3717  *	note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
3718  *	any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
3719  *	This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1,
3720  *	this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a
3721  *	software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this
3722  *	capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't
3723  *	advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is.
3724  *	The callback can sleep.
3725  *
3726  * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
3727  *	The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
3728  *	but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
3729  *	ieee80211_scan_completed().
3730  *	This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
3731  *	scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
3732  *	The callback can sleep.
3733  *
3734  * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
3735  *	specific intervals.  The driver must call the
3736  *	ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
3737  *	This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
3738  *
3739  * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
3740  *	In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
3741  *
3742  * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
3743  *	is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
3744  *	The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
3745  *	the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
3746  *	can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
3747  *
3748  * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
3749  *	software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
3750  *	this notification.
3751  *	The callback can sleep.
3752  *
3753  * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
3754  * 	Returns zero if statistics are available.
3755  *	The callback can sleep.
3756  *
3757  * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
3758  *	IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
3759  *	IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
3760  *	The callback must be atomic.
3761  *
3762  * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
3763  *	if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the
3764  *	stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG
3765  *	should be set as well.
3766  *	The callback can sleep.
3767  *
3768  * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
3769  *	The callback can sleep.
3770  *
3771  * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
3772  *	AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
3773  *
3774  * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
3775  *	station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
3776  *	returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
3777  *	no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
3778  *	the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3779  *	This callback can sleep.
3780  *
3781  * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3782  *	when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
3783  *	should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
3784  *	callback can sleep.
3785  *
3786  * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
3787  *	associated station, AP,  IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
3788  *	in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
3789  *	%IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
3790  *
3791  * @sta_set_txpwr: Configure the station tx power. This callback set the tx
3792  *	power for the station.
3793  *	This callback can sleep.
3794  *
3795  * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
3796  *	station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
3797  *	This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
3798  *	It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
3799  *	up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
3800  *	isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
3801  *	period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
3802  *	See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3803  *	The callback can sleep.
3804  *
3805  * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
3806  *	synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
3807  *	pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
3808  *	the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
3809  *	in @sta_state.
3810  *	The callback can sleep.
3811  *
3812  * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
3813  *	used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
3814  *	from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
3815  *	in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
3816  *	uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
3817  *	otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
3818  *	Must be atomic.
3819  * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
3820  *	is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
3821  *	the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
3822  *
3823  * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
3824  *	filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
3825  *	let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
3826  *	the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
3827  *	all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
3828  *	Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
3829  *	The callback can sleep.
3830  *
3831  * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
3832  *	bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
3833  *	Returns a negative error code on failure.
3834  *	The callback can sleep.
3835  *
3836  * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
3837  *	this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
3838  *	required function.
3839  *	The callback can sleep.
3840  *
3841  * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
3842  *	Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
3843  *	required function.
3844  *	The callback can sleep.
3845  *
3846  * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the
3847  *	firmware/hardware.  Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between
3848  *	calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up
3849  *	as TSF delay. Is not a required function.
3850  *	The callback can sleep.
3851  *
3852  * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3853  *	with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3854  *	function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3855  *	TSF synchronization.
3856  *	The callback can sleep.
3857  *
3858  * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3859  *	This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3860  *	used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
3861  *	Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
3862  *	The callback can sleep.
3863  *
3864  * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3865  *
3866  * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3867  *	need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3868  *	and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
3869  *	The callback can sleep.
3870  *
3871  * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3872  *	in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
3873  *	accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3874  *	estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3875  *	coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
3876  *
3877  * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3878  *	be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
3879  * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
3880  *
3881  * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
3882  *	that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3883  *	of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3884  *	use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3885  *	If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
3886  *	Note that vif can be NULL.
3887  *	The callback can sleep.
3888  *
3889  * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3890  *	switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3891  *	callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3892  *	completion of the channel switch.
3893  *
3894  * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3895  *	Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3896  *	reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3897  *	(also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3898  *
3899  * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
3900  *
3901  * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3902  *	call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3903  *	that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3904  *	offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3905  *	normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3906  *	duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
3907  *	ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
3908  *	Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3909  *	must be accepted in this case.
3910  *	This callback may sleep.
3911  * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3912  *	aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
3913  *
3914  * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3915  *
3916  * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
3917  *
3918  * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3919  *	queues before entering power save.
3920  *
3921  * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3922  *	when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3923  *	The callback can sleep.
3924  * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3925  *	&enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
3926  *	The callback must be atomic.
3927  *
3928  * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3929  *	parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3930  *	sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3931  *	to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
3932  *	Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
3933  *	if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3934  *	the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3935  *	the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3936  *	more-data bit must always be set.
3937  *	The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3938  *	from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
3939  *	In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3940  *	@num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3941  *	this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3942  *	on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3943  *	period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3944  *	responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
3945  *	In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3946  *	bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3947  *	at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
3948  *	setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3949  *	service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
3950  *	on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
3951  *	ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
3952  *	This callback must be atomic.
3953  * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3954  *	to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3955  *	via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
3956  *	released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
3957  *	and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3958  *	frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3959  *	them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3960  *	on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
3961  *	bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
3962  *	ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
3963  *	The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3964  *	frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3965  *	This callback must be atomic.
3966  *
3967  * @get_et_sset_count:  Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3968  *
3969  * @get_et_stats:  Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3970  *
3971  * @get_et_strings:  Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3972  *	and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3973  *
3974  * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3975  *	before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3976  *	bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3977  *	yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3978  *	transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3979  *	powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3980  *	management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3981  *	driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3982  *	and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3983  *	For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211
3984  *	would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication
3985  *	frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO.
3986  *	The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3987  *	mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
3988  *	Additional information is passed in the &struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info
3989  *	data. If duration there is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the
3990  *	driver the duration for which the operation is requested.
3991  *	The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
3992  * @mgd_complete_tx: Notify the driver that the response frame for a previously
3993  *	transmitted frame announced with @mgd_prepare_tx was received, the data
3994  *	is filled similarly to @mgd_prepare_tx though the duration is not used.
3995  *
3996  * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3997  *	a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3998  *	channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3999  *	setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
4000  *	mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
4001  *	discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
4002  *	2 * (DTIM period).
4003  *	The callback is optional and can sleep.
4004  *
4005  * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
4006  *	This callback may sleep.
4007  * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
4008  *	This callback may sleep.
4009  * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
4010  *	may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
4011  *	channel context with different settings
4012  *	This callback may sleep.
4013  * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
4014  *	to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
4015  *	This callback may sleep.
4016  * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
4017  *	unbound from vif.
4018  *	This callback may sleep.
4019  * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
4020  *	another, as specified in the list of
4021  *	@ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
4022  *	to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
4023  *	This callback may sleep.
4024  *
4025  * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
4026  *	information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
4027  *	context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
4028  *	software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
4029  *	just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
4030  *	disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
4031  * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
4032  *
4033  * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
4034  *	during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
4035  *	This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
4036  *	indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
4037  *	This callback may sleep.
4038  *
4039  * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
4040  *	Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
4041  *	This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
4042  *
4043  * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
4044  *	Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
4045  *	function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
4046  *	decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
4047  *	ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
4048  *	get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
4049  *	1 using ieee80211_beacon_counter_is_complete() after the beacon has been
4050  *	transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
4051  *	If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
4052  *	since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
4053  * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
4054  *	before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
4055  *	gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
4056  *	the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
4057  * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
4058  *	after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
4059  *	driver to go back to a normal configuration.
4060  * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
4061  *	when channel switch procedure was completed, allowing the
4062  *	driver to go back to a normal configuration.
4063  * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called
4064  *	when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with
4065  *	CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count.
4066  * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
4067  *	information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
4068  *	channel context is bound before this is called.
4069  * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
4070  *
4071  * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
4072  *	specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
4073  *	if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
4074  *
4075  * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
4076  *	and hardware limits.
4077  *
4078  * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
4079  *	is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
4080  *	and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
4081  *	driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
4082  *	the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
4083  *	The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
4084  *	optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
4085  * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
4086  *	peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
4087  * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
4088  *	response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
4089  *	parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
4090  *	an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
4091  *	response template is provided, together with the location of the
4092  *	switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
4093  *	the function call.
4094  *
4095  * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
4096  * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a
4097  *	synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues
4098  *	pending frames that were received prior to the control path action
4099  *	currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet.
4100  *
4101  * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one.
4102  * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster.
4103  * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf
4104  *	contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters
4105  *	are changed with respect to the last NAN config.
4106  *	The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since
4107  *	some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the
4108  *	changed parameters.
4109  * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in
4110  *	cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of
4111  *	this call.
4112  * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call
4113  *	ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with
4114  *	NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal.
4115  * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports
4116  *	aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation
4117  *	between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while
4118  *	skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU.
4119  * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available.
4120  *	Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided.
4121  *
4122  * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep)
4123  * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep)
4124  * @set_tid_config: Apply TID specific configurations. This callback may sleep.
4125  * @reset_tid_config: Reset TID specific configuration for the peer.
4126  *	This callback may sleep.
4127  * @update_vif_offload: Update virtual interface offload flags
4128  *	This callback may sleep.
4129  * @sta_set_4addr: Called to notify the driver when a station starts/stops using
4130  *	4-address mode
4131  * @set_sar_specs: Update the SAR (TX power) settings.
4132  * @sta_set_decap_offload: Called to notify the driver when a station is allowed
4133  *	to use rx decapsulation offload
4134  * @add_twt_setup: Update hw with TWT agreement parameters received from the peer.
4135  *	This callback allows the hw to check if requested parameters
4136  *	are supported and if there is enough room for a new agreement.
4137  *	The hw is expected to set agreement result in the req_type field of
4138  *	twt structure.
4139  * @twt_teardown_request: Update the hw with TWT teardown request received
4140  *	from the peer.
4141  * @set_radar_background: Configure dedicated offchannel chain available for
4142  *	radar/CAC detection on some hw. This chain can't be used to transmit
4143  *	or receive frames and it is bounded to a running wdev.
4144  *	Background radar/CAC detection allows to avoid the CAC downtime
4145  *	switching to a different channel during CAC detection on the selected
4146  *	radar channel.
4147  *	The caller is expected to set chandef pointer to NULL in order to
4148  *	disable background CAC/radar detection.
4149  * @net_fill_forward_path: Called from .ndo_fill_forward_path in order to
4150  *	resolve a path for hardware flow offloading
4151  * @change_vif_links: Change the valid links on an interface, note that while
4152  *	removing the old link information is still valid (link_conf pointer),
4153  *	but may immediately disappear after the function returns. The old or
4154  *	new links bitmaps may be 0 if going from/to a non-MLO situation.
4155  *	The @old array contains pointers to the old bss_conf structures
4156  *	that were already removed, in case they're needed.
4157  *	This callback can sleep.
4158  * @change_sta_links: Change the valid links of a station, similar to
4159  *	@change_vif_links. This callback can sleep.
4160  *	Note that a sta can also be inserted or removed with valid links,
4161  *	i.e. passed to @sta_add/@sta_state with sta->valid_links not zero.
4162  *	In fact, cannot change from having valid_links and not having them.
4163  */
4164 struct ieee80211_ops {
4165 	void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4166 		   struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
4167 		   struct sk_buff *skb);
4168 	int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4169 	void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4170 #ifdef CONFIG_PM
4171 	int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
4172 	int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4173 	void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
4174 #endif
4175 	int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4176 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4177 	int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4178 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4179 				enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
4180 	void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4181 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4182 	int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
4183 	void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4184 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4185 				 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
4186 				 u64 changed);
4187 	void (*vif_cfg_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4188 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4189 				u64 changed);
4190 	void (*link_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4191 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4192 				  struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
4193 				  u64 changed);
4194 
4195 	int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4196 			struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf);
4197 	void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4198 			struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf);
4199 
4200 	u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4201 				 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
4202 	void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4203 				 unsigned int changed_flags,
4204 				 unsigned int *total_flags,
4205 				 u64 multicast);
4206 	void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4207 				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4208 				    unsigned int filter_flags,
4209 				    unsigned int changed_flags);
4210 	int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4211 		       bool set);
4212 	int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
4213 		       struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4214 		       struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
4215 	void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4216 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4217 				struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
4218 				struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4219 				u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
4220 	void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4221 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4222 			       struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
4223 	void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4224 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
4225 	int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4226 		       struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
4227 	void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4228 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4229 	int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4230 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4231 				struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
4232 				struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
4233 	int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4234 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4235 	void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4236 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4237 			      const u8 *mac_addr);
4238 	void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4239 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4240 	int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4241 			 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
4242 	void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4243 			    struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
4244 			    struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4245 	int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
4246 	int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
4247 	int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4248 		       struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4249 	int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4250 			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4251 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
4252 	void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4253 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4254 				struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4255 				struct dentry *dir);
4256 #endif
4257 	void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4258 			enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4259 	int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4260 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4261 			     struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4262 	int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4263 			 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4264 			 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
4265 			 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
4266 	void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4267 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4268 				   struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4269 	void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4270 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4271 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4272 			      u32 changed);
4273 	void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4274 				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4275 				    struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4276 	void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4277 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4278 			       struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4279 			       struct station_info *sinfo);
4280 	int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4281 		       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4282 		       unsigned int link_id, u16 ac,
4283 		       const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
4284 	u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4285 	void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4286 			u64 tsf);
4287 	void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4288 			   s64 offset);
4289 	void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4290 	int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4291 
4292 	/**
4293 	 * @ampdu_action:
4294 	 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action.
4295 	 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
4296 	 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
4297 	 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
4298 	 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
4299 	 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
4300 	 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
4301 	 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
4302 	 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
4303 	 *
4304 	 * - ``TX: 1.....7``
4305 	 * - ``RX:  2....7`` (lost frame #1)
4306 	 * - ``TX:        8..1...``
4307 	 *
4308 	 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
4309 	 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
4310 	 *
4311 	 * - ``TX:        1   or``
4312 	 * - ``TX:        18  or``
4313 	 * - ``TX:        81``
4314 	 *
4315 	 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
4316 	 *
4317 	 * Returns a negative error code on failure. The driver may return
4318 	 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE for %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START
4319 	 * if the session can start immediately.
4320 	 *
4321 	 * The callback can sleep.
4322 	 */
4323 	int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4324 			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4325 			    struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
4326 	int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
4327 		struct survey_info *survey);
4328 	void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4329 	void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
4330 #ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
4331 	int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4332 			    void *data, int len);
4333 	int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
4334 			     struct netlink_callback *cb,
4335 			     void *data, int len);
4336 #endif
4337 	void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4338 		      u32 queues, bool drop);
4339 	void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4340 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4341 			       struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4342 	int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
4343 	int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
4344 
4345 	int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4346 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4347 				 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
4348 				 int duration,
4349 				 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
4350 	int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4351 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4352 	int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
4353 	void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4354 			      u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
4355 	bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4356 	int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4357 				const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
4358 	void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4359 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4360 			       const struct ieee80211_event *event);
4361 
4362 	void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4363 				      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4364 				      u16 tids, int num_frames,
4365 				      enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
4366 				      bool more_data);
4367 	void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4368 					struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4369 					u16 tids, int num_frames,
4370 					enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
4371 					bool more_data);
4372 
4373 	int	(*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4374 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
4375 	void	(*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4376 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4377 				struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
4378 	void	(*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4379 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4380 				  u32 sset, u8 *data);
4381 
4382 	void	(*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4383 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4384 				  struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info);
4385 	void	(*mgd_complete_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4386 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4387 				   struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info);
4388 
4389 	void	(*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4390 					     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4391 
4392 	int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4393 			   struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4394 	void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4395 			       struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4396 	void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4397 			       struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
4398 			       u32 changed);
4399 	int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4400 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4401 				  struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf,
4402 				  struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4403 	void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4404 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4405 				     struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf,
4406 				     struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4407 	int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4408 				  struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
4409 				  int n_vifs,
4410 				  enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
4411 
4412 	void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4413 				  enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
4414 
4415 #if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
4416 	void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4417 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4418 				 struct inet6_dev *idev);
4419 #endif
4420 	void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4421 				      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4422 				      struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
4423 	int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4424 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4425 				  struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4426 
4427 	int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4428 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4429 	void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4430 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4431 	void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4432 					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4433 					 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4434 
4435 	int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4436 	void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4437 	u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4438 				       struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4439 	int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4440 			   int *dbm);
4441 
4442 	int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4443 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4444 				   struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
4445 				   struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
4446 				   struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
4447 	void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4448 					   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4449 					   struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4450 	void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4451 					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4452 					 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
4453 
4454 	void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4455 			      struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
4456 	void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4457 
4458 	int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4459 			 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4460 			 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf);
4461 	int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4462 			struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4463 	int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4464 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4465 			       struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes);
4466 	int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4467 			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4468 			    const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func);
4469 	void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4470 			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4471 			    u8 instance_id);
4472 	bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4473 				       struct sk_buff *head,
4474 				       struct sk_buff *skb);
4475 	int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4476 				       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4477 				       struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats);
4478 	int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4479 			  struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4480 	void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4481 			   struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4482 	int (*set_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4483 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4484 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4485 			      struct cfg80211_tid_config *tid_conf);
4486 	int (*reset_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4487 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4488 				struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tids);
4489 	void (*update_vif_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4490 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4491 	void (*sta_set_4addr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4492 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled);
4493 	int (*set_sar_specs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4494 			     const struct cfg80211_sar_specs *sar);
4495 	void (*sta_set_decap_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4496 				      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4497 				      struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled);
4498 	void (*add_twt_setup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4499 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4500 			      struct ieee80211_twt_setup *twt);
4501 	void (*twt_teardown_request)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4502 				     struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 flowid);
4503 	int (*set_radar_background)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4504 				    struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
4505 	int (*net_fill_forward_path)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4506 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4507 				     struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4508 				     struct net_device_path_ctx *ctx,
4509 				     struct net_device_path *path);
4510 	int (*change_vif_links)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4511 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4512 				u16 old_links, u16 new_links,
4513 				struct ieee80211_bss_conf *old[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS]);
4514 	int (*change_sta_links)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4515 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4516 				struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4517 				u16 old_links, u16 new_links);
4518 };
4519 
4520 /**
4521  * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
4522  *
4523  * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4524  * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4525  * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4526  * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4527  * @priv_data_len.
4528  *
4529  * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4530  * @ops: callbacks for this device
4531  * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
4532  *	NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
4533  *
4534  * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4535  */
4536 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
4537 					   const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
4538 					   const char *requested_name);
4539 
4540 /**
4541  * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
4542  *
4543  * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4544  * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4545  * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4546  * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4547  * @priv_data_len.
4548  *
4549  * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4550  * @ops: callbacks for this device
4551  *
4552  * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4553  */
4554 static inline
ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,const struct ieee80211_ops * ops)4555 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
4556 					const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
4557 {
4558 	return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
4559 }
4560 
4561 /**
4562  * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
4563  *
4564  * You must call this function before any other functions in
4565  * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
4566  * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
4567  *
4568  * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4569  *
4570  * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
4571  */
4572 int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4573 
4574 /**
4575  * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
4576  * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
4577  * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
4578  *	(full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
4579  */
4580 struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
4581 	int throughput;
4582 	int blink_time;
4583 };
4584 
4585 /**
4586  * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
4587  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
4588  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
4589  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
4590  *	interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
4591  */
4592 enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
4593 	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO		= BIT(0),
4594 	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK		= BIT(1),
4595 	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED	= BIT(2),
4596 };
4597 
4598 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4599 const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4600 const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4601 const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4602 const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4603 const char *
4604 __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4605 				   unsigned int flags,
4606 				   const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4607 				   unsigned int blink_table_len);
4608 #endif
4609 /**
4610  * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
4611  *
4612  * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4613  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4614  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4615  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4616  *
4617  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4618  *
4619  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4620  */
ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw * hw)4621 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4622 {
4623 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4624 	return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
4625 #else
4626 	return NULL;
4627 #endif
4628 }
4629 
4630 /**
4631  * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
4632  *
4633  * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4634  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4635  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4636  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4637  *
4638  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4639  *
4640  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4641  */
ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw * hw)4642 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4643 {
4644 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4645 	return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
4646 #else
4647 	return NULL;
4648 #endif
4649 }
4650 
4651 /**
4652  * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
4653  *
4654  * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4655  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4656  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4657  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4658  *
4659  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4660  *
4661  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4662  */
ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw * hw)4663 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4664 {
4665 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4666 	return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
4667 #else
4668 	return NULL;
4669 #endif
4670 }
4671 
4672 /**
4673  * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
4674  *
4675  * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4676  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4677  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4678  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4679  *
4680  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4681  *
4682  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4683  */
ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw * hw)4684 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4685 {
4686 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4687 	return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
4688 #else
4689 	return NULL;
4690 #endif
4691 }
4692 
4693 /**
4694  * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
4695  * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
4696  * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
4697  * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
4698  * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
4699  *
4700  * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
4701  * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
4702  *
4703  * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
4704  */
4705 static inline const char *
ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,unsigned int flags,const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink * blink_table,unsigned int blink_table_len)4706 ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
4707 				 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4708 				 unsigned int blink_table_len)
4709 {
4710 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4711 	return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
4712 						  blink_table_len);
4713 #else
4714 	return NULL;
4715 #endif
4716 }
4717 
4718 /**
4719  * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
4720  *
4721  * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
4722  * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
4723  *
4724  * @hw: the hardware to unregister
4725  */
4726 void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4727 
4728 /**
4729  * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
4730  *
4731  * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
4732  * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
4733  * before calling this function.
4734  *
4735  * @hw: the hardware to free
4736  */
4737 void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4738 
4739 /**
4740  * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
4741  *
4742  * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
4743  * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
4744  * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
4745  * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
4746  * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
4747  * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
4748  *
4749  * @hw: the hardware to restart
4750  */
4751 void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4752 
4753 /**
4754  * ieee80211_rx_list - receive frame and store processed skbs in a list
4755  *
4756  * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4757  * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4758  * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4759  * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4760  * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4761  *
4762  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4763  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4764  * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4765  * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4766  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4767  *
4768  * This function must be called with BHs disabled and RCU read lock
4769  *
4770  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4771  * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
4772  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4773  * @list: the destination list
4774  */
4775 void ieee80211_rx_list(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4776 		       struct sk_buff *skb, struct list_head *list);
4777 
4778 /**
4779  * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
4780  *
4781  * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4782  * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4783  * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4784  * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4785  * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4786  *
4787  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4788  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4789  * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4790  * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4791  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4792  *
4793  * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
4794  *
4795  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4796  * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
4797  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4798  * @napi: the NAPI context
4799  */
4800 void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4801 		       struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi);
4802 
4803 /**
4804  * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
4805  *
4806  * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4807  * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4808  * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4809  * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4810  * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4811  *
4812  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4813  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4814  * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4815  * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4816  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4817  *
4818  * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
4819  *
4820  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4821  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4822  */
ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct sk_buff * skb)4823 static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
4824 {
4825 	ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL);
4826 }
4827 
4828 /**
4829  * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
4830  *
4831  * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
4832  * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4833  *
4834  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
4835  * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
4836  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4837  *
4838  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4839  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4840  */
4841 void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
4842 
4843 /**
4844  * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
4845  *
4846  * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
4847  * (internally disables bottom halves).
4848  *
4849  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
4850  * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4851  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4852  *
4853  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4854  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4855  */
ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct sk_buff * skb)4856 static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4857 				   struct sk_buff *skb)
4858 {
4859 	local_bh_disable();
4860 	ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
4861 	local_bh_enable();
4862 }
4863 
4864 /**
4865  * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
4866  *
4867  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
4868  * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
4869  * entering/leaving PS mode.
4870  *
4871  * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
4872  *
4873  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
4874  * each other.
4875  *
4876  * @sta: currently connected sta
4877  * @start: start or stop PS
4878  *
4879  * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
4880  */
4881 int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
4882 
4883 /**
4884  * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
4885  *                                  (in process context)
4886  *
4887  * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
4888  * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
4889  * applies.
4890  *
4891  * @sta: currently connected sta
4892  * @start: start or stop PS
4893  *
4894  * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
4895  */
ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta * sta,bool start)4896 static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4897 						  bool start)
4898 {
4899 	int ret;
4900 
4901 	local_bh_disable();
4902 	ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
4903 	local_bh_enable();
4904 
4905 	return ret;
4906 }
4907 
4908 /**
4909  * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received
4910  * @sta: currently connected station
4911  *
4912  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4913  * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a
4914  * connected station was received.
4915  * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4916  * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must
4917  * be serialized.
4918  */
4919 void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4920 
4921 /**
4922  * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received
4923  * @sta: currently connected station
4924  * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame
4925  *
4926  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4927  * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame
4928  * from a connected station was received.
4929  * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4930  * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be
4931  * serialized.
4932  * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown.
4933  * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC
4934  * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper
4935  * checks.
4936  */
4937 void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
4938 
4939 /*
4940  * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
4941  * This is enough for the radiotap header.
4942  */
4943 #define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM	ALIGN(14, 4)
4944 
4945 /**
4946  * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
4947  * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
4948  * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
4949  * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
4950  *
4951  * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
4952  * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
4953  * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
4954  *
4955  * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
4956  * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
4957  * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
4958  * call! Beware of the locking!)
4959  *
4960  * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
4961  * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
4962  * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
4963  * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
4964  * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
4965  * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
4966  *
4967  * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
4968  * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
4969  * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
4970  * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
4971  * use this API.
4972  */
4973 void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4974 				u8 tid, bool buffered);
4975 
4976 /**
4977  * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
4978  *
4979  * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
4980  * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
4981  * rate selection table for the station entry.
4982  *
4983  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4984  * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
4985  * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
4986  * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
4987  * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
4988  */
4989 void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4990 			    struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4991 			    struct sk_buff *skb,
4992 			    struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
4993 			    int max_rates);
4994 
4995 /**
4996  * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station
4997  *
4998  * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput
4999  * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can
5000  * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station
5001  * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic
5002  * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause
5003  * slow stations to starve).
5004  *
5005  * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for.
5006  * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps.
5007  */
5008 void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
5009 					   u32 thr);
5010 
5011 /**
5012  * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback
5013  *
5014  * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta
5015  * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision
5016  * in updating the tx rate in data path.
5017  *
5018  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
5019  * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for.
5020  * @info: tx status information
5021  */
5022 void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5023 			      struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
5024 			      struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
5025 
5026 /**
5027  * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
5028  *
5029  * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
5030  * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
5031  * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
5032  *
5033  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
5034  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
5035  * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
5036  * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
5037  * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
5038  *
5039  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
5040  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
5041  */
5042 void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5043 			 struct sk_buff *skb);
5044 
5045 /**
5046  * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback
5047  *
5048  * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
5049  * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not
5050  * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info.
5051  *
5052  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
5053  * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
5054  * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
5055  *
5056  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
5057  * @status: tx status information
5058  */
5059 void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5060 			     struct ieee80211_tx_status *status);
5061 
5062 /**
5063  * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
5064  *
5065  * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
5066  * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
5067  * specific skbs.
5068  *
5069  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
5070  * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
5071  * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
5072  *
5073  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
5074  * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
5075  *	(NULL for multicast packets)
5076  * @info: tx status information
5077  */
ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_sta * sta,struct ieee80211_tx_info * info)5078 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5079 					     struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5080 					     struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
5081 {
5082 	struct ieee80211_tx_status status = {
5083 		.sta = sta,
5084 		.info = info,
5085 	};
5086 
5087 	ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status);
5088 }
5089 
5090 /**
5091  * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
5092  *
5093  * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
5094  *
5095  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
5096  * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
5097  * for a single hardware.
5098  *
5099  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
5100  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
5101  */
ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct sk_buff * skb)5102 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5103 					  struct sk_buff *skb)
5104 {
5105 	local_bh_disable();
5106 	ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
5107 	local_bh_enable();
5108 }
5109 
5110 /**
5111  * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
5112  *
5113  * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
5114  * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
5115  *
5116  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
5117  * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
5118  *
5119  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
5120  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
5121  */
5122 void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5123 				 struct sk_buff *skb);
5124 
5125 /**
5126  * ieee80211_tx_status_8023 - transmit status callback for 802.3 frame format
5127  *
5128  * Call this function for all transmitted data frames after their transmit
5129  * completion. This callback should only be called for data frames which
5130  * are using driver's (or hardware's) offload capability of encap/decap
5131  * 802.11 frames.
5132  *
5133  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
5134  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other and all
5135  * calls in the same tx status family.
5136  *
5137  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
5138  * @vif: the interface for which the frame was transmitted
5139  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
5140  */
5141 void ieee80211_tx_status_8023(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5142 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5143 			       struct sk_buff *skb);
5144 
5145 /**
5146  * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
5147  *
5148  * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
5149  * connected STA.
5150  *
5151  * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
5152  * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
5153  */
5154 void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
5155 
5156 #define IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM 2
5157 
5158 /**
5159  * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
5160  * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
5161  * @tim_length: size of TIM element
5162  * @cntdwn_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
5163  *	to countdown counters.  This array can contain zero values which
5164  *	should be ignored.
5165  * @mbssid_off: position of the multiple bssid element
5166  */
5167 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
5168 	u16 tim_offset;
5169 	u16 tim_length;
5170 
5171 	u16 cntdwn_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM];
5172 	u16 mbssid_off;
5173 };
5174 
5175 /**
5176  * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
5177  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5178  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5179  * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
5180  *	receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
5181  * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for a non-MLD AP)
5182  *
5183  * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
5184  * obtain the beacon template.
5185  *
5186  * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
5187  * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
5188  * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
5189  * applicable, the CSA count.
5190  *
5191  * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
5192  *
5193  * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
5194  */
5195 struct sk_buff *
5196 ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5197 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5198 			      struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs,
5199 			      unsigned int link_id);
5200 
5201 /**
5202  * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
5203  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5204  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5205  * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
5206  *	Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
5207  * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
5208  *	(including the ID and length bytes!).
5209  *	Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
5210  * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for a non-MLD AP)
5211  *
5212  * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
5213  * obtain the beacon frame.
5214  *
5215  * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
5216  * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
5217  * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
5218  * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
5219  *
5220  * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
5221  *
5222  * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
5223  */
5224 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5225 					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5226 					 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length,
5227 					 unsigned int link_id);
5228 
5229 /**
5230  * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
5231  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5232  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5233  * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for a non-MLD AP)
5234  *
5235  * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
5236  *
5237  * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
5238  */
ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_vif * vif,unsigned int link_id)5239 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5240 						   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5241 						   unsigned int link_id)
5242 {
5243 	return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL, link_id);
5244 }
5245 
5246 /**
5247  * ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn - request mac80211 to decrement the beacon countdown
5248  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5249  *
5250  * The beacon counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
5251  * This function is called implicitly when
5252  * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
5253  * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
5254  * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's beacon countdown.
5255  *
5256  * Return: new countdown value
5257  */
5258 u8 ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5259 
5260 /**
5261  * ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn - request mac80211 to set beacon countdown
5262  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5263  * @counter: the new value for the counter
5264  *
5265  * The beacon countdown can be changed by the device, this API should be
5266  * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211.
5267  *
5268  * It should never be used together with ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(),
5269  * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value.
5270  */
5271 void ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter);
5272 
5273 /**
5274  * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
5275  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5276  *
5277  * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
5278  * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
5279  * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
5280  */
5281 void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5282 
5283 /**
5284  * ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete - find out if countdown reached 1
5285  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5286  *
5287  * This function returns whether the countdown reached zero.
5288  */
5289 bool ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5290 
5291 /**
5292  * ieee80211_color_change_finish - notify mac80211 about color change
5293  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5294  *
5295  * After a color change announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
5296  * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
5297  * notify mac80211 that the color can be changed
5298  */
5299 void ieee80211_color_change_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5300 
5301 /**
5302  * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
5303  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5304  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5305  *
5306  * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5307  * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
5308  *
5309  * Can only be called in AP mode.
5310  *
5311  * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
5312  */
5313 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5314 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5315 
5316 /**
5317  * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
5318  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5319  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5320  *
5321  * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
5322  * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
5323  * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
5324  *
5325  * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
5326  * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
5327  *
5328  * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
5329  */
5330 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5331 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5332 
5333 /**
5334  * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
5335  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5336  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5337  * @link_id: If the vif is an MLD, get a frame with the link addresses
5338  *	for the given link ID. For a link_id < 0 you get a frame with
5339  *	MLD addresses, however useful that might be.
5340  * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set
5341  *	if at all possible
5342  *
5343  * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
5344  * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
5345  * BSSID and address is used.
5346  *
5347  * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the
5348  * returned packet will be QoS NDP.
5349  *
5350  * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
5351  * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
5352  *
5353  * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
5354  */
5355 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5356 				       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5357 				       int link_id, bool qos_ok);
5358 
5359 /**
5360  * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5361  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5362  * @src_addr: source MAC address
5363  * @ssid: SSID buffer
5364  * @ssid_len: length of SSID
5365  * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
5366  *
5367  * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5368  * hardware.
5369  *
5370  * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
5371  */
5372 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5373 				       const u8 *src_addr,
5374 				       const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
5375 				       size_t tailroom);
5376 
5377 /**
5378  * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
5379  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5380  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5381  * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
5382  * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
5383  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5384  * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
5385  *
5386  * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
5387  * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5388  * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
5389  * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
5390  */
5391 void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5392 		       const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
5393 		       const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
5394 		       struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
5395 
5396 /**
5397  * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
5398  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5399  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5400  * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
5401  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5402  *
5403  * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
5404  * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5405  * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
5406  *
5407  * Return: The duration.
5408  */
5409 __le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5410 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
5411 			      const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
5412 
5413 /**
5414  * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
5415  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5416  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5417  * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
5418  * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
5419  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5420  * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
5421  *
5422  * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
5423  * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5424  * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
5425  * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
5426  */
5427 void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5428 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5429 			     const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
5430 			     const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
5431 			     struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
5432 
5433 /**
5434  * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
5435  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5436  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5437  * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
5438  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5439  *
5440  * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
5441  * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5442  * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
5443  *
5444  * Return: The duration.
5445  */
5446 __le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5447 				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5448 				    size_t frame_len,
5449 				    const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
5450 
5451 /**
5452  * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
5453  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5454  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5455  * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
5456  * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
5457  * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
5458  *
5459  * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
5460  * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
5461  *
5462  * Return: The duration.
5463  */
5464 __le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5465 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5466 					enum nl80211_band band,
5467 					size_t frame_len,
5468 					struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
5469 
5470 /**
5471  * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
5472  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5473  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5474  *
5475  * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
5476  * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
5477  * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
5478  * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
5479  * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
5480  *
5481  * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
5482  * frames are available.
5483  *
5484  * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
5485  * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
5486  * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
5487  * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
5488  * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
5489  * use common code for all beacons.
5490  */
5491 struct sk_buff *
5492 ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5493 
5494 /**
5495  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
5496  *
5497  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
5498  *
5499  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5500  * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5501  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5502  */
5503 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5504 			       u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5505 
5506 /**
5507  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
5508  *
5509  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
5510  * from the given packet.
5511  *
5512  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5513  * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
5514  *	with this P1K
5515  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5516  */
ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf * keyconf,struct sk_buff * skb,u16 * p1k)5517 static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5518 					  struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
5519 {
5520 	struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
5521 	const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
5522 	u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
5523 
5524 	ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
5525 }
5526 
5527 /**
5528  * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
5529  *
5530  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
5531  * and transmitter address.
5532  *
5533  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5534  * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
5535  * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5536  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5537  */
5538 void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5539 			       const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5540 
5541 /**
5542  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
5543  *
5544  * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
5545  * in the packet.
5546  *
5547  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5548  * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
5549  *	encrypted with this key
5550  * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
5551  */
5552 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5553 			    struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
5554 
5555 /**
5556  * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
5557  *
5558  * @pos: start of crypto header
5559  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5560  * @pn: PN to add
5561  *
5562  * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
5563  * the packet payload)
5564  *
5565  * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
5566  * point to the crypto header)
5567  */
5568 u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);
5569 
5570 /**
5571  * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
5572  *
5573  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5574  * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5575  *	the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5576  *	CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5577  * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
5578  *
5579  * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
5580  * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
5581  * by the device and not by mac80211.
5582  *
5583  * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5584  * can be done concurrently.
5585  */
5586 void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5587 			      int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5588 
5589 /**
5590  * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
5591  *
5592  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5593  * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5594  *	the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5595  *	CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5596  * @seq: new sequence data
5597  *
5598  * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
5599  * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
5600  * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
5601  * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
5602  *
5603  * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5604  * can be done concurrently.
5605  */
5606 void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5607 			      int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5608 
5609 /**
5610  * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
5611  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5612  *
5613  * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
5614  * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
5615  * instead assumed to have been removed already.
5616  *
5617  * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
5618  * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
5619  */
5620 void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5621 
5622 /**
5623  * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
5624  * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
5625  * @keyconf: new key data
5626  *
5627  * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
5628  * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
5629  * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
5630  *
5631  * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
5632  * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
5633  * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
5634  * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
5635  *
5636  * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
5637  * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
5638  * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
5639  * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
5640  * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
5641  * of the reconfiguration.
5642  *
5643  * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
5644  * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
5645  *
5646  * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
5647  * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
5648  * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
5649  * the key that's being replaced.
5650  */
5651 struct ieee80211_key_conf *
5652 ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5653 			struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5654 
5655 /**
5656  * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
5657  * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
5658  * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
5659  * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
5660  * @gfp: allocation flags
5661  */
5662 void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
5663 				const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
5664 
5665 /**
5666  * ieee80211_key_mic_failure - increment MIC failure counter for the key
5667  *
5668  * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called
5669  * at the same time.
5670  *
5671  * @keyconf: the key in question
5672  */
5673 void ieee80211_key_mic_failure(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5674 
5675 /**
5676  * ieee80211_key_replay - increment replay counter for the key
5677  *
5678  * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called
5679  * at the same time.
5680  *
5681  * @keyconf: the key in question
5682  */
5683 void ieee80211_key_replay(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5684 
5685 /**
5686  * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
5687  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5688  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5689  *
5690  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5691  */
5692 void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5693 
5694 /**
5695  * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
5696  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5697  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5698  *
5699  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5700  */
5701 void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5702 
5703 /**
5704  * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
5705  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5706  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5707  *
5708  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5709  *
5710  * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
5711  */
5712 
5713 int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5714 
5715 /**
5716  * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
5717  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5718  *
5719  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5720  */
5721 void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5722 
5723 /**
5724  * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
5725  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5726  *
5727  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5728  */
5729 void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5730 
5731 /**
5732  * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
5733  *
5734  * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
5735  * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
5736  * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
5737  * any context, including hardirq context.
5738  *
5739  * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
5740  * @info: information about the completed scan
5741  */
5742 void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5743 			      struct cfg80211_scan_info *info);
5744 
5745 /**
5746  * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
5747  *
5748  * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
5749  * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
5750  *
5751  * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5752  */
5753 void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5754 
5755 /**
5756  * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
5757  *
5758  * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
5759  * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
5760  * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
5761  * while associating, for instance.
5762  *
5763  * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5764  */
5765 void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5766 
5767 /**
5768  * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
5769  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
5770  *	been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
5771  *	reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
5772  *	interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
5773  *	haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5774  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
5775  *	interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5776  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
5777  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER: Skip any interfaces where SDATA
5778  *	is not in the driver.  This may fix crashes during firmware recovery
5779  *	for instance.
5780  */
5781 enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
5782 	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL	= 0,
5783 	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL	= BIT(0),
5784 	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE	= BIT(1),
5785 	IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER	= BIT(2),
5786 };
5787 
5788 /**
5789  * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
5790  *
5791  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5792  * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
5793  * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
5794  * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5795  *
5796  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5797  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5798  * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5799  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5800  */
5801 void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5802 				  void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5803 						   struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5804 				  void *data);
5805 
5806 /**
5807  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
5808  *
5809  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5810  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5811  * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
5812  * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
5813  * be used.
5814  * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5815  *
5816  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5817  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5818  * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5819  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5820  */
5821 static inline void
ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,u32 iter_flags,void (* iterator)(void * data,u8 * mac,struct ieee80211_vif * vif),void * data)5822 ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5823 				    void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5824 						     struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5825 				    void *data)
5826 {
5827 	ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
5828 				     iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
5829 				     iterator, data);
5830 }
5831 
5832 /**
5833  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
5834  *
5835  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5836  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5837  * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5838  * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
5839  * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5840  *
5841  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5842  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5843  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5844  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5845  */
5846 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5847 						u32 iter_flags,
5848 						void (*iterator)(void *data,
5849 						    u8 *mac,
5850 						    struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5851 						void *data);
5852 
5853 /**
5854  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx - iterate active interfaces
5855  *
5856  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5857  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5858  * This version can only be used while holding the wiphy mutex.
5859  * The driver must not call this with a lock held that it can also take in
5860  * response to callbacks from mac80211, and it must not call this within
5861  * callbacks made by mac80211 - both would result in deadlocks.
5862  *
5863  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5864  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5865  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5866  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5867  */
5868 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5869 					     u32 iter_flags,
5870 					     void (*iterator)(void *data,
5871 						u8 *mac,
5872 						struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5873 					     void *data);
5874 
5875 /**
5876  * ieee80211_iterate_stations - iterate stations
5877  *
5878  * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
5879  * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
5880  * function for them.
5881  * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
5882  * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic can be used.
5883  *
5884  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5885  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5886  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5887  */
5888 void ieee80211_iterate_stations(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5889 				void (*iterator)(void *data,
5890 						 struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
5891 				void *data);
5892 
5893 /**
5894  * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
5895  *
5896  * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
5897  * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
5898  * function for them.
5899  * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5900  *
5901  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5902  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5903  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5904  */
5905 void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5906 				       void (*iterator)(void *data,
5907 						struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
5908 				       void *data);
5909 /**
5910  * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5911  *
5912  * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
5913  * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
5914  *
5915  * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5916  * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
5917  */
5918 void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
5919 
5920 /**
5921  * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5922  *
5923  * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
5924  * workqueue.
5925  *
5926  * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5927  * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
5928  * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
5929  */
5930 void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5931 				  struct delayed_work *dwork,
5932 				  unsigned long delay);
5933 
5934 /**
5935  * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
5936  * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
5937  * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5938  * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
5939  *
5940  * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
5941  *
5942  * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5943  * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5944  * will be managed by the mac80211.
5945  */
5946 int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
5947 				  u16 timeout);
5948 
5949 /**
5950  * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
5951  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5952  * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5953  * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5954  *
5955  * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5956  * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
5957  * from any context.
5958  */
5959 void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5960 				      u16 tid);
5961 
5962 /**
5963  * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
5964  * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
5965  * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
5966  *
5967  * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
5968  *
5969  * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5970  * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5971  * will be managed by the mac80211.
5972  */
5973 int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
5974 
5975 /**
5976  * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
5977  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5978  * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5979  * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
5980  *
5981  * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5982  * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
5983  * can be called from any context.
5984  */
5985 void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5986 				     u16 tid);
5987 
5988 /**
5989  * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
5990  *
5991  * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
5992  * @addr: station's address
5993  *
5994  * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5995  *
5996  * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5997  * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5998  */
5999 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6000 					 const u8 *addr);
6001 
6002 /**
6003  * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
6004  *
6005  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6006  * @addr: remote station's address
6007  * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
6008  *
6009  * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
6010  *
6011  * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
6012  * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
6013  *
6014  * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
6015  *      the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
6016  *      We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
6017  *      logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
6018  *      BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
6019  *      In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
6020  *      is not reliable.
6021  *
6022  * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
6023  */
6024 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6025 					       const u8 *addr,
6026 					       const u8 *localaddr);
6027 
6028 /**
6029  * ieee80211_find_sta_by_link_addrs - find STA by link addresses
6030  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6031  * @addr: remote station's link address
6032  * @localaddr: local link address, use %NULL for any (but avoid that)
6033  * @link_id: pointer to obtain the link ID if the STA is found,
6034  *	may be %NULL if the link ID is not needed
6035  *
6036  * Obtain the STA by link address, must use RCU protection.
6037  */
6038 struct ieee80211_sta *
6039 ieee80211_find_sta_by_link_addrs(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6040 				 const u8 *addr,
6041 				 const u8 *localaddr,
6042 				 unsigned int *link_id);
6043 
6044 /**
6045  * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
6046  * @hw: the hardware
6047  * @pubsta: the station
6048  * @block: whether to block or unblock
6049  *
6050  * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
6051  * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
6052  * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
6053  * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
6054  * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
6055  *
6056  * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
6057  * manner.
6058  *
6059  * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
6060  * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
6061  * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
6062  * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
6063  * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
6064  * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
6065  * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
6066  * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
6067  * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
6068  * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
6069  * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
6070  * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
6071  * woke up while blocked or not.
6072  */
6073 void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6074 			       struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
6075 
6076 /**
6077  * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
6078  * @pubsta: the station
6079  *
6080  * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
6081  * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
6082  * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
6083  * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
6084  *
6085  * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
6086  * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
6087  * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
6088  * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
6089  *
6090  * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
6091  *     driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
6092  *     you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
6093  *     and restore the _irqsafe version!
6094  */
6095 void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
6096 
6097 /**
6098  * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
6099  * @pubsta: the station
6100  * @tid: the tid of the NDP
6101  *
6102  * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
6103  * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
6104  * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
6105  * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
6106  * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
6107  * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
6108  * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
6109  * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
6110  * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
6111  * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
6112  * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
6113  * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
6114  * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
6115  * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
6116  */
6117 void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
6118 
6119 /**
6120  * ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates - recalculate aggregate data after a change
6121  * @pubsta: the station
6122  *
6123  * Call this function after changing a per-link aggregate data as referenced in
6124  * &struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates by accessing the agg field of
6125  * &struct ieee80211_link_sta.
6126  *
6127  * With non MLO the data in deflink will be referenced directly. In that case
6128  * there is no need to call this function.
6129  */
6130 void ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
6131 
6132 /**
6133  * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid
6134  *
6135  * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver must call
6136  * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of
6137  * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule
6138  * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness.
6139  *
6140  * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent
6141  * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not
6142  * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the
6143  * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame
6144  * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission
6145  * attempts.
6146  *
6147  * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or
6148  * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available.
6149  * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of
6150  * them to 0.
6151  *
6152  * @pubsta: the station
6153  * @tid: the TID to register airtime for
6154  * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec)
6155  * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec)
6156  */
6157 void ieee80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
6158 				    u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime);
6159 
6160 /**
6161  * ieee80211_txq_airtime_check - check if a txq can send frame to device
6162  *
6163  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6164  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6165  *
6166  * Return true if the AQL's airtime limit has not been reached and the txq can
6167  * continue to send more packets to the device. Otherwise return false.
6168  */
6169 bool
6170 ieee80211_txq_airtime_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6171 
6172 /**
6173  * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
6174  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6175  * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
6176  * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
6177  * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
6178  *
6179  * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
6180  * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
6181  * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
6182  * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
6183  * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
6184  * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
6185  *
6186  * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
6187  * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
6188  * set_key callback.
6189  */
6190 void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6191 			 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6192 			 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6193 				      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6194 				      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6195 				      struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
6196 				      void *data),
6197 			 void *iter_data);
6198 
6199 /**
6200  * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
6201  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6202  * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
6203  * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
6204  * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
6205  *
6206  * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
6207  * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
6208  * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
6209  * in removal process will be skipped.
6210  *
6211  * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
6212  * and thus iter must be atomic.
6213  */
6214 void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6215 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6216 			     void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6217 					  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6218 					  struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6219 					  struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
6220 					  void *data),
6221 			     void *iter_data);
6222 
6223 /**
6224  * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
6225  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
6226  * @iter: iterator function
6227  * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
6228  *
6229  * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
6230  * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
6231  * places while calling into the driver.
6232  *
6233  * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
6234  * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
6235  * removed.
6236  *
6237  * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
6238  * before the restart are considered already present so will be
6239  * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
6240  * or not.
6241  */
6242 void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
6243 	struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6244 	void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6245 		     struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
6246 		     void *data),
6247 	void *iter_data);
6248 
6249 /**
6250  * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
6251  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
6252  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6253  *
6254  * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
6255  * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
6256  * information. This function must only be called from within the
6257  * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
6258  * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
6259  * %NULL.
6260  *
6261  * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
6262  */
6263 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6264 					  struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6265 
6266 /**
6267  * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
6268  *
6269  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6270  *
6271  * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
6272  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
6273  * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
6274  */
6275 void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6276 
6277 /**
6278  * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
6279  *
6280  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6281  *
6282  * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
6283  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
6284  * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
6285  * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
6286  * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
6287  *
6288  * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
6289  * without connection recovery attempts.
6290  */
6291 void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6292 
6293 /**
6294  * ieee80211_disconnect - request disconnection
6295  *
6296  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6297  * @reconnect: immediate reconnect is desired
6298  *
6299  * Request disconnection from the current network and, if enabled, send a
6300  * hint to the higher layers that immediate reconnect is desired.
6301  */
6302 void ieee80211_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool reconnect);
6303 
6304 /**
6305  * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
6306  *
6307  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6308  *
6309  * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
6310  * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
6311  * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
6312  * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
6313  * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
6314  *
6315  * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
6316  * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
6317  * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
6318  * disconnect normally later.
6319  *
6320  * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
6321  * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
6322  * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
6323  * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
6324  */
6325 void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6326 
6327 /**
6328  * ieee80211_hw_restart_disconnect - disconnect from AP after
6329  * hardware restart
6330  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6331  *
6332  * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after
6333  * hardware restart.
6334  */
6335 void ieee80211_hw_restart_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6336 
6337 /**
6338  * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
6339  *	rssi threshold triggered
6340  *
6341  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6342  * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
6343  * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available
6344  * @gfp: context flags
6345  *
6346  * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
6347  * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
6348  * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
6349  */
6350 void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6351 			       enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
6352 			       s32 rssi_level,
6353 			       gfp_t gfp);
6354 
6355 /**
6356  * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
6357  *
6358  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6359  * @gfp: context flags
6360  */
6361 void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
6362 
6363 /**
6364  * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
6365  *
6366  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6367  */
6368 void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6369 
6370 /**
6371  * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
6372  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6373  * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
6374  *
6375  * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
6376  * and wake up the suspended queues.
6377  */
6378 void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
6379 
6380 /**
6381  * ieee80211_channel_switch_disconnect - disconnect due to channel switch error
6382  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6383  * @block_tx: if %true, do not send deauth frame.
6384  *
6385  * Instruct mac80211 to disconnect due to a channel switch error. The channel
6386  * switch can request to block the tx and so, we need to make sure we do not send
6387  * a deauth frame in this case.
6388  */
6389 void ieee80211_channel_switch_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6390 					 bool block_tx);
6391 
6392 /**
6393  * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
6394  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6395  * @link_id: link ID for MLO, or 0
6396  * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
6397  *
6398  * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
6399  * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
6400  * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
6401  */
6402 void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, unsigned int link_id,
6403 			    enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
6404 
6405 /**
6406  * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
6407  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6408  */
6409 void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6410 
6411 /**
6412  * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
6413  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6414  */
6415 void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6416 
6417 /**
6418  * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
6419  *
6420  * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
6421  * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
6422  * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
6423  * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
6424  * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
6425  * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
6426  *
6427  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6428  * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
6429  * @addr: & to bssid mac address
6430  */
6431 void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
6432 				  const u8 *addr);
6433 
6434 /**
6435  * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
6436  * @pubsta: station struct
6437  * @tid: the session's TID
6438  * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
6439  *	assumed to be out of the window after the call
6440  * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
6441  * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
6442  *
6443  * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
6444  * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
6445  * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
6446  * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
6447  */
6448 void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
6449 					  u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
6450 					  u16 received_mpdus);
6451 
6452 /**
6453  * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
6454  *
6455  * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
6456  * buffer.
6457  *
6458  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6459  * @ra: the peer's destination address
6460  * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
6461  * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
6462  */
6463 void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
6464 
6465 /**
6466  * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work
6467  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6468  * @addr: station mac address
6469  * @tid: the rx tid
6470  */
6471 void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr,
6472 				 unsigned int tid);
6473 
6474 /**
6475  * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
6476  *
6477  * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
6478  * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
6479  * reordering.
6480  *
6481  * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
6482  * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
6483  *
6484  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6485  * @addr: station mac address
6486  * @tid: the rx tid
6487  */
ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif * vif,const u8 * addr,u16 tid)6488 static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6489 						      const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
6490 {
6491 	if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
6492 		return;
6493 	ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid);
6494 }
6495 
6496 /**
6497  * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
6498  *
6499  * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
6500  * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
6501  * reordering.
6502  *
6503  * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
6504  * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
6505  *
6506  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6507  * @addr: station mac address
6508  * @tid: the rx tid
6509  */
ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif * vif,const u8 * addr,u16 tid)6510 static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6511 						     const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
6512 {
6513 	if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
6514 		return;
6515 	ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS);
6516 }
6517 
6518 /**
6519  * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout
6520  *
6521  * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx
6522  * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer.
6523  *
6524  * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa.
6525  *
6526  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6527  * @addr: station mac address
6528  * @tid: the rx tid
6529  */
6530 void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6531 				   const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid);
6532 
6533 /* Rate control API */
6534 
6535 /**
6536  * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
6537  *
6538  * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
6539  * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
6540  * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
6541  * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
6542  *	to be filled in
6543  * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
6544  *	which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
6545  *	used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
6546  * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
6547  *	RTS threshold
6548  * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
6549  *	if the selected rate supports it
6550  * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
6551  * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
6552  * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
6553  */
6554 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
6555 	struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
6556 	struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
6557 	struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
6558 	struct sk_buff *skb;
6559 	struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
6560 	bool rts, short_preamble;
6561 	u32 rate_idx_mask;
6562 	u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
6563 	bool bss;
6564 };
6565 
6566 /**
6567  * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities
6568  */
6569 enum rate_control_capabilities {
6570 	/**
6571 	 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW:
6572 	 * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable)
6573 	 * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains
6574 	 * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has,
6575 	 * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us.
6576 	 */
6577 	RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0),
6578 	/**
6579 	 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER:
6580 	 * mac80211 should start A-MPDU sessions on tx
6581 	 */
6582 	RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER = BIT(1),
6583 };
6584 
6585 struct rate_control_ops {
6586 	unsigned long capa;
6587 	const char *name;
6588 	void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6589 	void (*add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, void *priv,
6590 			    struct dentry *debugfsdir);
6591 	void (*free)(void *priv);
6592 
6593 	void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
6594 	void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6595 			  struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
6596 			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
6597 	void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6598 			    struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
6599 			    struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6600 			    u32 changed);
6601 	void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6602 			 void *priv_sta);
6603 
6604 	void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv,
6605 			      struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6606 			      void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st);
6607 	void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6608 			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6609 			  struct sk_buff *skb);
6610 	void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6611 			 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
6612 
6613 	void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
6614 				struct dentry *dir);
6615 
6616 	u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
6617 };
6618 
rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta * sta,enum nl80211_band band,int index)6619 static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6620 				 enum nl80211_band band,
6621 				 int index)
6622 {
6623 	return (sta == NULL || sta->deflink.supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
6624 }
6625 
6626 static inline s8
rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band * sband,struct ieee80211_sta * sta)6627 rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6628 		  struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6629 {
6630 	int i;
6631 
6632 	for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6633 		if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6634 			return i;
6635 
6636 	/* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
6637 	WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
6638 
6639 	/* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
6640 	return 0;
6641 }
6642 
6643 static inline
rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band * sband,struct ieee80211_sta * sta)6644 bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6645 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6646 {
6647 	unsigned int i;
6648 
6649 	for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6650 		if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6651 			return true;
6652 	return false;
6653 }
6654 
6655 /**
6656  * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
6657  *
6658  * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
6659  * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
6660  * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
6661  * the most recent rate control module decision.
6662  *
6663  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6664  * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
6665  * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
6666  */
6667 int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6668 			   struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
6669 			   struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
6670 
6671 int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6672 void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6673 
6674 static inline bool
conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6675 conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6676 {
6677 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
6678 }
6679 
6680 static inline bool
conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6681 conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6682 {
6683 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6684 	       conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6685 }
6686 
6687 static inline bool
conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6688 conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6689 {
6690 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6691 	       conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6692 }
6693 
6694 static inline bool
conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6695 conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6696 {
6697 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
6698 }
6699 
6700 static inline bool
conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6701 conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6702 {
6703 	return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
6704 		(conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
6705 		(conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
6706 }
6707 
6708 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type,bool p2p)6709 ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
6710 {
6711 	if (p2p) {
6712 		switch (type) {
6713 		case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
6714 			return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
6715 		case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
6716 			return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
6717 		default:
6718 			break;
6719 		}
6720 	}
6721 	return type;
6722 }
6723 
6724 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif * vif)6725 ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
6726 {
6727 	return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
6728 }
6729 
6730 /**
6731  * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
6732  *
6733  * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6734  * @link_id: the link ID for MLO, otherwise 0
6735  * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
6736  * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
6737  *
6738  * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
6739  * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
6740  * matching GroupId management frame.
6741  * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
6742  */
6743 void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, unsigned int link_id,
6744 				const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);
6745 
6746 void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6747 				   int rssi_min_thold,
6748 				   int rssi_max_thold);
6749 
6750 void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6751 
6752 /**
6753  * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
6754  *
6755  * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6756  *
6757  * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
6758  *
6759  * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
6760  * applicable.
6761  */
6762 int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6763 
6764 /**
6765  * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
6766  * @vif: virtual interface
6767  * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
6768  * @gfp: allocation flags
6769  *
6770  * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
6771  */
6772 void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6773 				    struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
6774 				    gfp_t gfp);
6775 
6776 /**
6777  * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
6778  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6779  * @vif: virtual interface
6780  * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
6781  * @band: the band to transmit on
6782  * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
6783  *
6784  * Note: must be called under RCU lock
6785  */
6786 bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6787 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
6788 			      int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
6789 
6790 /**
6791  * ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap - Sanity-check and parse the radiotap header
6792  *				 of injected frames.
6793  *
6794  * To accurately parse and take into account rate and retransmission fields,
6795  * you must initialize the chandef field in the ieee80211_tx_info structure
6796  * of the skb before calling this function.
6797  *
6798  * @skb: packet injected by userspace
6799  * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
6800  */
6801 bool ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap(struct sk_buff *skb,
6802 				 struct net_device *dev);
6803 
6804 /**
6805  * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
6806  *
6807  * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
6808  * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
6809  *
6810  * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
6811  *
6812  * private:
6813  *
6814  * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
6815  * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
6816  */
6817 struct ieee80211_noa_data {
6818 	u32 next_tsf;
6819 	bool has_next_tsf;
6820 
6821 	u8 absent;
6822 
6823 	u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6824 	struct {
6825 		u32 start;
6826 		u32 duration;
6827 		u32 interval;
6828 	} desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6829 };
6830 
6831 /**
6832  * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
6833  *
6834  * @attr: P2P NoA IE
6835  * @data: NoA tracking data
6836  * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6837  *
6838  * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
6839  */
6840 int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
6841 			    struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6842 
6843 /**
6844  * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
6845  *
6846  * @data: NoA tracking data
6847  * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6848  */
6849 void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6850 
6851 /**
6852  * ieee80211_tdls_oper_request - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
6853  * @vif: virtual interface
6854  * @peer: the peer's destination address
6855  * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
6856  * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
6857  * @gfp: allocation flags
6858  *
6859  * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
6860  */
6861 void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
6862 				 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
6863 				 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
6864 
6865 /**
6866  * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
6867  *
6868  * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
6869  * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
6870  * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
6871  * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
6872  * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
6873  * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
6874  *
6875  * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
6876  * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
6877  * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6878  *
6879  * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
6880  * @tid: the TID to reserve
6881  *
6882  * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
6883  */
6884 int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6885 
6886 /**
6887  * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
6888  *
6889  * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
6890  * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
6891  * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
6892  *
6893  * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
6894  * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
6895  * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6896  *
6897  * @sta: the station
6898  * @tid: the TID to unreserve
6899  */
6900 void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6901 
6902 /**
6903  * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6904  *
6905  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6906  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6907  *	ieee80211_next_txq()
6908  *
6909  * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
6910  *
6911  * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section,
6912  * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in
6913  * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by RCU and thus the
6914  * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call
6915  * but for the duration of the frame handling.
6916  * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method,
6917  * rcu_read_lock() is already held.
6918  *
6919  * softirqs must also be disabled when this function is called.
6920  * In process context, use ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni() instead.
6921  */
6922 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6923 				     struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6924 
6925 /**
6926  * ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6927  * (in process context)
6928  *
6929  * Like ieee80211_tx_dequeue() but can be called in process context
6930  * (internally disables bottom halves).
6931  *
6932  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6933  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6934  *	ieee80211_next_txq()
6935  */
ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_txq * txq)6936 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6937 						      struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
6938 {
6939 	struct sk_buff *skb;
6940 
6941 	local_bh_disable();
6942 	skb = ieee80211_tx_dequeue(hw, txq);
6943 	local_bh_enable();
6944 
6945 	return skb;
6946 }
6947 
6948 /**
6949  * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from
6950  *
6951  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6952  * @ac: AC number to return packets from.
6953  *
6954  * Returns the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq
6955  * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the
6956  * driver has finished scheduling it.
6957  */
6958 struct ieee80211_txq *ieee80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6959 
6960 /**
6961  * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs
6962  *
6963  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6964  * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for
6965  *
6966  * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq().
6967  * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently.
6968  */
6969 void ieee80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6970 
6971 /* (deprecated) */
ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,u8 ac)6972 static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac)
6973 {
6974 }
6975 
6976 void __ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6977 			      struct ieee80211_txq *txq, bool force);
6978 
6979 /**
6980  * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission
6981  *
6982  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6983  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6984  *
6985  * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled,
6986  * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered.
6987  *
6988  * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for
6989  * this TXQ internally.
6990  */
6991 static inline void
ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_txq * txq)6992 ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
6993 {
6994 	__ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, true);
6995 }
6996 
6997 /**
6998  * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq()
6999  *
7000  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
7001  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
7002  * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets.
7003  *
7004  * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ
7005  * internally.
7006  */
7007 static inline void
ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_txq * txq,bool force)7008 ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
7009 		     bool force)
7010 {
7011 	__ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, force);
7012 }
7013 
7014 /**
7015  * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit
7016  *
7017  * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by
7018  * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime
7019  * fairness accounting without going using the scheduling order enfored by
7020  * next_txq().
7021  *
7022  * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to
7023  * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have
7024  * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will
7025  * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit
7026  * again.
7027  *
7028  * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be
7029  * aligned against driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates
7030  * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry
7031  * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this
7032  * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets
7033  * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq().
7034  *
7035  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
7036  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
7037  */
7038 bool ieee80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
7039 				struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
7040 
7041 /**
7042  * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
7043  *
7044  * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
7045  * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
7046  * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
7047  *
7048  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
7049  * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
7050  * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
7051  */
7052 void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
7053 			     unsigned long *frame_cnt,
7054 			     unsigned long *byte_cnt);
7055 
7056 /**
7057  * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination.
7058  *
7059  * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination.
7060  * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
7061  *
7062  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
7063  * @inst_id: the local instance id
7064  * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*)
7065  * @gfp: allocation flags
7066  */
7067 void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
7068 				   u8 inst_id,
7069 				   enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason,
7070 				   gfp_t gfp);
7071 
7072 /**
7073  * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event.
7074  *
7075  * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The
7076  * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211.
7077  * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
7078  *
7079  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
7080  * @match: match event information
7081  * @gfp: allocation flags
7082  */
7083 void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
7084 			      struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match,
7085 			      gfp_t gfp);
7086 
7087 /**
7088  * ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for RX.
7089  *
7090  * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
7091  * rate information in the RX status struct and the frame length.
7092  *
7093  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
7094  * @status: &struct ieee80211_rx_status containing the transmission rate
7095  *          information.
7096  * @len: frame length in bytes
7097  */
7098 u32 ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
7099 			      struct ieee80211_rx_status *status,
7100 			      int len);
7101 
7102 /**
7103  * ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for TX.
7104  *
7105  * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
7106  * rate information in the TX info struct and the frame length.
7107  *
7108  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
7109  * @info: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
7110  * @len: frame length in bytes
7111  */
7112 u32 ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
7113 			      struct ieee80211_tx_info *info,
7114 			      int len);
7115 /**
7116  * ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap - enable hardware encapsulation offloading.
7117  *
7118  * This function is used to notify mac80211 that a vif can be passed raw 802.3
7119  * frames. The driver needs to then handle the 802.11 encapsulation inside the
7120  * hardware or firmware.
7121  *
7122  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
7123  * @enable: indicate if the feature should be turned on or off
7124  */
7125 bool ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool enable);
7126 
7127 /**
7128  * ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl - Get FILS discovery template.
7129  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
7130  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
7131  *
7132  * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
7133  *
7134  * Return: FILS discovery template. %NULL on error.
7135  */
7136 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
7137 						  struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
7138 
7139 /**
7140  * ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl - Get unsolicited broadcast
7141  *	probe response template.
7142  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
7143  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
7144  *
7145  * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
7146  *
7147  * Return: Unsolicited broadcast probe response template. %NULL on error.
7148  */
7149 struct sk_buff *
7150 ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
7151 					  struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
7152 
7153 /**
7154  * ieeee80211_obss_color_collision_notify - notify userland about a BSS color
7155  * collision.
7156  *
7157  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
7158  * @color_bitmap: a 64 bit bitmap representing the colors that the local BSS is
7159  *	aware of.
7160  * @gfp: allocation flags
7161  */
7162 void
7163 ieeee80211_obss_color_collision_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
7164 				       u64 color_bitmap, gfp_t gfp);
7165 
7166 /**
7167  * ieee80211_is_tx_data - check if frame is a data frame
7168  *
7169  * The function is used to check if a frame is a data frame. Frames with
7170  * hardware encapsulation enabled are data frames.
7171  *
7172  * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
7173  */
ieee80211_is_tx_data(struct sk_buff * skb)7174 static inline bool ieee80211_is_tx_data(struct sk_buff *skb)
7175 {
7176 	struct ieee80211_tx_info *info = IEEE80211_SKB_CB(skb);
7177 	struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (void *) skb->data;
7178 
7179 	return info->flags & IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP ||
7180 	       ieee80211_is_data(hdr->frame_control);
7181 }
7182 
7183 /**
7184  * ieee80211_set_active_links - set active links in client mode
7185  * @vif: interface to set active links on
7186  * @active_links: the new active links bitmap
7187  *
7188  * This changes the active links on an interface. The interface
7189  * must be in client mode (in AP mode, all links are always active),
7190  * and @active_links must be a subset of the vif's valid_links.
7191  *
7192  * If a link is switched off and another is switched on at the same
7193  * time (e.g. active_links going from 0x1 to 0x10) then you will get
7194  * a sequence of calls like
7195  *  - change_vif_links(0x11)
7196  *  - unassign_vif_chanctx(link_id=0)
7197  *  - change_sta_links(0x11) for each affected STA (the AP)
7198  *    (TDLS connections on now inactive links should be torn down)
7199  *  - remove group keys on the old link (link_id 0)
7200  *  - add new group keys (GTK/IGTK/BIGTK) on the new link (link_id 4)
7201  *  - change_sta_links(0x10) for each affected STA (the AP)
7202  *  - assign_vif_chanctx(link_id=4)
7203  *  - change_vif_links(0x10)
7204  *
7205  * Note: This function acquires some mac80211 locks and must not
7206  *	 be called with any driver locks held that could cause a
7207  *	 lock dependency inversion. Best call it without locks.
7208  */
7209 int ieee80211_set_active_links(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 active_links);
7210 
7211 /**
7212  * ieee80211_set_active_links_async - asynchronously set active links
7213  * @vif: interface to set active links on
7214  * @active_links: the new active links bitmap
7215  *
7216  * See ieee80211_set_active_links() for more information, the only
7217  * difference here is that the link change is triggered async and
7218  * can be called in any context, but the link switch will only be
7219  * completed after it returns.
7220  */
7221 void ieee80211_set_active_links_async(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
7222 				      u16 active_links);
7223 
7224 #endif /* MAC80211_H */
7225